JP6710548B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine.

Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination, the AT is determined. A gaming machine for increasing the number of games is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

JP, 2010-057732, A

However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the AT game number is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the AT game number has been demanded.

The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing without getting bored.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main switch) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol display is achieved by stopping the rotation of the reel. The reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, a winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won, and a predetermined condition. When the above is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state When the combination target combination (for example, 3 consecutive Chilelips) is determined as an internal winning combination , the duration of the advantageous state is extended, and when the combination other than the addition target combination is determined as an internal winning combination, Add-on control means that does not extend the duration of the advantageous state (for example, the main control board 71), and counting means that counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended by the add-on control means in the addition game state (for example, CT game number counter, main control board 71) and the counting When the counting result of the means reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) , the addition game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the addition game state is provided, and the addition target combination has a predetermined combination. included, the plus control means, the number of unit game that extending the duration during said plus gaming state, when the number of times more than a specific number, according to the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination When the number of unit games in which the duration is extended by a first additional amount (for example, 10 games) and the duration is extended during the additional playing state exceeds the specific number, the predetermined winning combination is internally won. It is characterized in that the continuation period is extended by a second additional amount (for example, 20 games) larger than the first additional amount in response to the combination being determined.

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the additional game state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended (addition is not performed) during the addition game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the addition game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state continues for a longer time as the additional game is performed. For the player, it does not know how long the add-on game state will continue, and as long as the add-on is in the add-on game state, the add-on game state does not end, so for the game in the add-on game state It is possible to continue to play the game without getting bored because of a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while the player is in the additional playing state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. In the machine, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means (for example, a display window) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. 4), start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detecting means, an internal winning combination is selected from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. , The main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, thereby stopping the rotation of the reel. When the reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means and the variation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, Based on a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, a winning determination means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, When the condition of is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning in the additional game state. When the winning combination determining means determines an additional winning combination (for example, three consecutive Chilelips) as an internal winning combination, the duration of the advantageous state is extended, and a winning combination other than the additional winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. , An addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) that does not extend the duration of the advantageous state, and a counting means that counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended by the addition control means in the addition gaming state ( For example, CT game counter, main control board 71), When the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times), the addition game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) that ends the addition game state, and the addition target combination is a predetermined number. If the number of unit games in which the duration is extended during the additional game state is less than a specific number of times greater than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined combination is included. The number of unit games in which the continuation period is extended by a first additional amount (for example, 10 games) in response to being determined as a winning combination, and the continuation period is extended during the additional gaming state is the specific number of times. When it exceeds, the predetermined duration is extended by the second additional amount (for example, 20 games) larger than the first additional amount in response to the determination of the internal winning combination.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the continuation period is extended in response to the predetermined winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination. And

According to such a gaming machine, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value when the addition is carried out triggered by the predetermined winning combination. As a result, for example, even if the additional game state is about to end (the count result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game is started with the predetermined combination as a trigger, and the additional game state is restarted from the beginning. Therefore, it is possible to have an expectation that the additional amount per time will increase. Here, in order not to resume the addition game state, in order to have the game property of increasing the addition amount per time, the winning probability of the predetermined combination must be a certain probability or more, and the game balance is lost. Although there is a possibility that it will be lost, even if the winning probability of a predetermined combination is suppressed by restarting the addition game state, it is possible to give the game property of increasing the addition amount per time, and the game balance While trying, it is possible to give a high playability.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance interest in adding an advantageous state.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is the whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachi-slot machine. It is the whole front view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a schematic layout drawing of the inside of the case of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachi-slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of display screen displayed on the sub-display apparatus of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub-control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence or absence of the notification of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing the abbreviation of the winning combination in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability random determination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode up lottery table in CZ1 memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 middle point up lottery table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability random determination table memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in normal ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table on which the number of sets in CT stored in the said pachi-slot machine was added. It is a diagram showing a flow of the game during the bonus in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a bonus type lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a lottery table for adding the number of bonus ART games stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a bonus lot end CT lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART memorize|stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side in the said pachi-slot machine, and the notification performed by the sub side. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing according to the state of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine during normal start. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of start during normal ART of the pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CT start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB start of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initialization process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows RT check processing of the above-mentioned pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ/ART termination of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen of the sub display apparatus of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during the CT sign in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachi-slot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during normal ART memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the add-on lottery table in ART memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table in CT memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end random determination table memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table memorize|stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT precursor in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification during MB flag in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in a pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the lock state and notification in the pachi-slot machine of a modification.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachi-slot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as a game medium for playing a game. As the game medium, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, etc. can be applied in addition to medals. Further, in the present embodiment, the replay probability is higher than the normal time during the assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like and the specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which RT and RT simultaneously operate will be described.

[Function flow of pachi-slot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a player inserts a medal and the start lever 6 is operated, one value (from a random number in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) ( Hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted.

An internal winning combination determination means (a main CPU 31 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determination means determines a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game for the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30) (establishment of a predetermined starting condition). Determines the internal winning combination.

By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the pay line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning", in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus are given to the player, and other so-called "miss". And related items are provided.

Subsequently, when the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is pressed by the player after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, reel stop control means (main CPU 31, which will be described later, motor drive circuit, which will be described later). 39, the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R described later) perform control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. To do.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move along with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R within the specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination which permits the display of the winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel combination is used for the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) by using the above specified time. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are reeled in within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the activated line by using the above specified time. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning. Determine whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line based on the fact that the reel stop control means stops the fluctuation of the symbols.

When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is called a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is called a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the above-described series of flow, various effects can be produced by using light (image) output by the display unit 100, sound output by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Done.

When the start lever is operated, a random number value for rendering (hereinafter, a random number value for rendering) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect content to be executed this time from the plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control board, which will be described later, plays a role of the effect contents determination means.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in association with each trigger such as the start of the rotation of the reel, the stop of the rotation of each reel, and the determination of whether or not there is a winning. To do. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed for) is executed by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided to the player and the interest of the player can be improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
The functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The case 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 is a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front side of the cabinet 61, and a lower front side of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b disposed in the. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment (for example, reels) used in the game. The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so as to be able to close the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61.

The upper door 62a has the display unit 100 at the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in the upper center of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later. In the display window 4, an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a lower right diagonal cross down line are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3×3 pattern. The five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed in the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3×3 symbols displayed by the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line of these five lines is the effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for winning determination.

The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11, which will be described later, or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, “the number of inserted medals” includes both the number of BETs by the operation of the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted coins actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on the outer peripheral surface of which a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations/minute) to variably display the symbol row.

Below the display window 4, a pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed. In the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, a medal slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1 bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, there is provided a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) that lights up when a medal can be inserted.

By depressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (three) provided for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1 bet button is pressed. When the 1 bet button is operated three times, three medals used for unit games are inserted and the activated line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (the operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are referred to as “insertion operation”.

An information display 14 is provided in the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up corresponding to the number of medals inserted in the game this time (hereinafter referred to as the inserted number). In addition, the information display 14 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals stored in the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). A digital display (not shown) that digitally displays to the player is provided.

Further, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation necessary for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the activated line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a “push order combination”, which is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed is different depending on the order of stop operations (push order), is provided. The aspect uniquely corresponding to the information on the stop operation to be notified is, for example, displaying “1” when notifying the pressing order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)”. , "2nd" is displayed when the push order "2nd (first stop operation is performed on the inside reel 3C)" is displayed, and the push order "3rd (first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R). Is performed”) is displayed. Details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30, which will be described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub control board 72 may be used to notify the stop operation information. The display unit 100 may notify the information of the stop operation.

In this case, the notification mode in the instruction monitor and the notification mode in other means may be different modes. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor). Even if displayed, some players may not be able to specify the content of the notification, and cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the pressing order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor uniquely displays “1” corresponding to the pressing order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) causes the first stop operation to be left. It may be possible to directly notify that the reel 3L is to be performed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information of a necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the game state. More specifically, the information about the stop operation may be notified in the below-described ART game state (see FIG. 33) without notifying the information about the stop operation in the below-described general game state (non-ART).

Further, on the left side of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching the credit/payout of medals acquired by the player by a push button operation. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, there is a predetermined start lever 6 as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the tilting operation of the player and starting the variable display of the symbols in the display window 4. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the angle range.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R as stop operation means for stopping the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R by a player's pressing operation are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6, and ends when all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

A first sub display device 201 and a second sub display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are liquid crystal displays and organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) displays, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral to the surface of the front surface of the lower door 62b that is erected substantially vertically from the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal slot 22 side).

At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the received operation of the player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as an electrostatic capacitance method, and upon receipt of a player's operation, outputs a signal according to the operation as touch input information. The first sub display device 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

Speakers 9L and 9R that produce effects such as sound effects and sounds are provided on the front side of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout port 15 for paying out medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. The medal receiving portion 16 that stores the paid out medals is provided at the lowermost portion of the lower door 62b.

Further, in the lower front surface of the lower door 62b, on the surface sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16 above and below, there is a waist panel 25 having a design corresponding to the model motif. It is installed. The waist panel 25 is illuminated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind the waist panel 25.

[Structure of display unit]
Next, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 28.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 behind the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device including an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes the image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and, for example, the position (projection distance or angle By projecting an image generated according to the effect information and the shape, it is possible to achieve a powerful and powerful effect.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 and obliquely downward and rearward of the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged in the rear part of the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the backward direction. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, a ventilation hole 21a of the cabinet 61 is arranged in the air flow direction in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole 21a.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (direction of emission of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the front surface of the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a concave portion B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the vertical angle adjustment holes B311 and B311.

Further, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion and has a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 and the mounting holes B334, B344 in the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311, B311 and the mounting holes B314, B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with the left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holder B11 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and the screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 of the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screw penetrating the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 is the screw of the mirror stoppers B33, B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screwing with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are screw-fastened via the mounting holes B314, B334, B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34. B32 is clamped. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

A spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected to each other. It is sandwiched between. The screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13, B13 symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 is projected more forward than the cabinet 61 of FIG. At the center of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 is formed so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the projection so that the angle can be adjusted. ..

In addition, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding horizontally from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 61, and is set to have a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been done. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in each of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the width of the second protruding portion B131b is formed wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet 61.

A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal plate (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed on the entire surface of the porous plate B15 in a substantially evenly dispersed manner. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhausting mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower side position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper part B15a on the front side, an inclined part B15b on the middle side, and a lower part B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by bending the rear side of the inclined portion B15b in the horizontal direction.

The upper side portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a and cover it from below with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. There is. As shown in FIG. 10, the front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

As will be described later in detail, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is arranged in an upper position that is a standby posture that prohibits appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that allows appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is tilted substantially parallel to and close to the tilted part B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without any flow resistance, and a plurality of air holes are generated. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling efficiency.

Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that the eye position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. Even if the irradiation light device B exists on the horizontal line of the part and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line of sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. Thereby, the display unit 100 can unitize the irradiation light device B and the screen device C into a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing upright at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 standing upright at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected on the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side on which the player is located and the top side on which the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 that form the screen housing C10 are independently formed into predetermined shapes, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be attached thereto. Has been As a result, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared, it is possible to share the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
More specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape in a top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there are provided a center placement part C11 arranged in the center part, and a right placement part C12 and a left placement part C13 arranged in the left-right direction around the center placement part C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D into the central mounting portion C11. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 are positioned by positioning the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 respectively by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6. It is placed as possible.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, the front side portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 when the display unit 100 is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61. It is possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61 by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions coincide with each other in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is incorporated in the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws by fastening the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 with screws. Then, the user extends his/her hand into the cabinet 61 and holds the operation openings C21, C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands, and the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61. After that, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, a hand is extended into the screen device C from one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit 100, and the crank gear E21 which is viewed in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

In the state where the upper door 62a is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and then from the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be unlocked without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay board CK is provided on the back surface thereof. The relay board CK allows a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 to be aggregated to perform wiring with the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that the relay board CK is placed in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 303 of an intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is arranged below the relay board CK, and a signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C to facilitate wiring work, and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom in designing the device C is expanded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, by extending the hand from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that irradiation targets can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: screen device C: screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between a front exposed position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided rotatably between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the turning distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the turning distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other so that the overlapping of the operation regions due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set higher than the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on the condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference when the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 rotate together.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right surface reflection part D2, a left surface reflection part D3, and a bottom surface reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, respectively.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflective portions as long as the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of reflective surfaces at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose curvature center point is located on the front surface side and which has continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged to face the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected forward. Is set to. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflection portion D1. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width of the front reflection portion D1 in the left-right direction. This makes it easier for the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 to reflect the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface toward the front reflecting portion D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflecting portion D4 as well, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction, part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the lightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents white blur due to light mixing due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In addition, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, the reflection of the irradiation light on the other reflection portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflection portion D1 can be reduced, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflection portion D1.

As the lightness, the brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as it can be expressed in relative values with respect to white.

The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the light reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value that is about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is set to the front screen. The color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be made black. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A black pigment may be added to the coating material applied to the base material.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only white pigments among white pigments and black pigments, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white pigments and black pigments may be included. In addition, the ratio of black pigment to white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than that in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be higher (about 10 to 20%). As the coating material to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known coating materials for screens can be appropriately adopted and can be adjusted according to the type of the screen (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The black pigment is not included in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the lightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10. It is desirable to reduce the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall, so that the brightness is low. The lower the better. That is, it is preferable that the color of the surrounding wall be closer to black.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a flat projection surface E11a so that an image without distortion appears when the irradiation light is irradiated.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set to have two levels of depth, a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the step E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing the projection surface E11a to be distorted.

The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. The first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness, for example, a pattern related to a game effect.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by being bonded with an adhesive. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state where the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen drive mechanism E2 connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end portion (one end portion) connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is rotatable at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line that passes through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines forward rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight lines and a curved line connecting the ends of the two straight lines. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b is set such that the surface of the groove wall surface E22b1 corresponding to the straight portion is parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight line portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, and the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of giving all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having 0 degrees of freedom, in which the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends and the slide member E26 is a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because the tangential direction of the turning trajectory is parallel to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

When the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is slidable with the slide groove E22b so as to be movable along the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface to form a two-degree-of-freedom link. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 27). After reaching the maximum speed, the speed gradually decreases, and the stopped state becomes 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached. As a result, the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in the state where the angular acceleration is small (inertia moment), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce breakdown and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3 so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the.

The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface which is the rotation center side. This pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position. In addition, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 has a pattern formed on the peripheral portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion serves as the projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, an image can be displayed by irradiation of irradiation light.

One ends of the left and right reel screen support parts F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen part F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protrusion (not shown). The protruding portion horizontally protrudes to the outside of each reel screen support portion F12, F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Performance by screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause the image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, the effect using the planar image display and the sense of depth (stereoscopic effect). It is possible to perform an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to be emitted by the irradiation light from the irradiation device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image is caused to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, so that the distortion occurs when the irradiation light is emitted. It is possible to make an image with no image appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this flat image.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to be displayed by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a plurality of reflecting portions included in the fixed screen mechanism D cause a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect). It is possible to cause a certain image to appear, and it is possible to execute an effect using this image with a sense of depth.

In addition, for example, when the screen mechanism for displaying an image by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, by causing the image to appear on the reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, A curved image can be made to appear, and an effect using this curved image can be executed.

[Display Example of First Sub Display Device]
Next, the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a part of a display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201. As shown in FIG. 29, the first sub-display device 201 displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, and 215. The plurality of display screens are switched according to the operation of the player accepted via the touch sensor 201a.

The top screen 211 is an initial screen of the display screens displayed on the first sub display device 201, and displays the menu button 211a and the outline game history 211b. The menu button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 by being operated (tapped) by the player. The outline game history 211b displays a part of the game history of the pachi-slot machine 1 (summary game history). In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed as the outline game history.

The menu screen 212 is a menu of the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201, and includes a return button 212a, a registration button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach button 212e, and a WEB. A site button 212f and a volume button 212g are displayed. The return button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 when operated by the player. Further, the registration button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons for calling the corresponding display screens by being operated by the player.

For example, when the registration button 212b is operated by the player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering the player who is playing the game is called. In pachi-slot machines of recent years, a service is widely used in which a player is registered for each model and various information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission is managed from the player's past game history. .. The registration screen called by the registration button 212b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving the provision of this service.

When the player operates the explanation button 212c, an explanation screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, a description of specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and introduction of characters appearing in the effect of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, when the array payout button 212d is operated by the player, an array payout screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, a correspondence relationship (payout table) between a combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachi-slot machine 1 and a privilege when it is determined to be a prize, and symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Rows (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

Further, when the reach eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The reach eyes of the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed on the reach eye screen. The reach eye is a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the activated line. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eye lip shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. The combination of symbols is applicable. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols of the reach eye lip is displayed along the activated line, thereafter, a state advantageous to the player (for example, bonus state, normal ART or CT (FIG. 33) is obtained. See))) will be decided to move to.

Further, when the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, a WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of any WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachi-slot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachi-slot machine 1 Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

When the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of sounds output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

Here, since the first sub display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and during the game (that is, the display unit 100 performs the effect. Even if it is “medium”, the display of the first sub display device 201 can be switched. The player may want to know the characters that appear in the effect on the display unit 100, for example. In such a case, by operating the explanation button 212c and calling the explanation screen, the relationship between the characters and the like can be seen. Can be grasped during the game. In addition, the player may want to grasp the symbols that should be used as a guide for winning the rare combination during the reel rotation when the so-called rare combination is won. In such a case, the array payout button 212d By operating the to call the array payout screen, the reel array can be grasped.

The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens that display a detailed game history including a summary game history displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachi-slot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a return button 213a, a menu button 213b, a previous button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The return button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the front button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screens by being operated by the player, and when the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen 213 is switched to the game information screen. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. Further, the game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachi-slot machine 1.

The game information screen 214 displays a return button 214a, a menu button 214b, a previous button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The return button 214a and the menu button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the forward button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons that are operated by the player to switch the game information screen in a predetermined order. Further, the game history 214e displays the number of CZ (chance zone) rushes and the number of successes in the pachi-slot machine 1. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZ, the number of plunges and the number of successes of CZ1 to CZ1 to 3 are displayed in the game history 214e.

The game information screen 215 displays a return button 215a, a menu button 215b, a previous button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The return button 215a and the menu button 215b are operation buttons that are called by the player to call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively. Further, the previous button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons that are operated by the player to switch the game information screens in a predetermined order. Further, the game history 215e displays the number of winnings of a so-called small winning combination in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the winning probability (fraction where the numerator is 1).

The display screens displayed on the first sub-display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on the operation buttons displayed on each display screen, or may be switched based on a swipe operation on the display screens. May be

[Circuit configuration of pachi-slot machine]
The structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, an external centralized terminal board 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 has the microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses.

The main CPU 31 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the purpose.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
As peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 30, there are stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. Further, at the input/output port of the microcomputer 30, a motor drive circuit 39 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, and Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes a symbol varying means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbol displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition.

The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have made one rotation, by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, in accordance with each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R make one rotation.

The stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R once, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant angle.

After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 31 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As a result, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

Next, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 50 detects the reel index.

That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position at which the reel index is detected.

The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 to the outside has reached the payout number. ..

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of inserted/dispensed medals from the main control board 71, the number of games played, and bonus operation presence/absence information, and displays these signals on the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display device or host computer in the game arcade. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachi-slot machine 1, and updates the display in association with the progress of the number of games and bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal insertion and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal payout or replay, and is output at the time of medal payout (including credit storage) or at the time of replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons and switches and the information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so that information can be transmitted only to the sub relay board 75, and the sub relay board 75 does not transmit information. As a result, the one-way communication between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 is performed so that information can be transmitted only from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detection means and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the selector. Further, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. Further, the 1 bet switch detects that the 1 bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the activated line based on the detection result of the medal sensor 42S or the MAX bet switch 11S and the 1 bet switch. The settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 is pressed by the player.

In addition, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R that display the acceptance status of these are uniquely set to the number of medals and advantageous stop operation. Is connected to the information display device 14 (instruction monitor).

<Sub control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control board 71. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, a random number value for effect is extracted to determine effect contents (effect data), and An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 9R is included.

In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation, sound data regarding BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a pattern of turning on/off light.

The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

30 and 31, the display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are connected to the sub control substrate 72 via a predetermined relay substrate. For example, the sub-control board 72 has a accessory relay board (not shown) connected to the display unit 100, and a first sub-display apparatus 201 and a second sub-display apparatus via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). It is connected to 202. The display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub control board 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Further, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying the wiring that connects the sub control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub control board 72. .. For example, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). The sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I/O board (not shown), and the sub control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Pachislot machine game state transition flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a game state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence/absence of a bonus winning/actuation, the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (F_BB1, 2,) is won/actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is the bonus winning state and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state is Indicates that the bonus is operating.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a bonus-related winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus-related winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of a winning combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is an internal winning winning combination involving a replay Is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability of a winning combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination is high.

These RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags, RT1 game state flag to RT5 game state flag, and manages the RT game state by managing ON/OFF of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state flag that is ON as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT game status flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT game status is the RT1 game status.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the winning combination (F_BB1,2) is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state, the main control board 71 shifts from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Change state. Then, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the state between flags to the bonus state when a bonus winning combination is won in the state between (2) flags.

Further, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state when the number of medals paid out exceeds the specified number (216) in the (3) bonus state. In this RT1 game state, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the RT1 game state to the RT0 game state when (4) 20 games have passed, and (5) Bell spilled eyes are displayed before 20 games have passed. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the (5) bell spill is displayed.

Further, the main control board 71, (6) when RT3 transition Lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, transitions the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) RT4 transition Lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state. Further, the main control board 71 (8) when the bell spill or the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly in the RT4 gaming state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spill is determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bell (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, the RT2 transition rips are in the pushing order determined for each type of maintenance lips when the maintenance rips (F_maintenance rep_1st, F_maintenance rep_2nd, F_maintenance rep_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT3 transition rips, in the case where RT3 rips (F_RT3 rip_1st, F_RT3 rip_213, F_RT3 rip_231, F_RT3 rip_3rd), which will be described later, are determined as the internal winning combination, the pushing order determined for each type of the RT3 rips. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT4 transition rips are RT4 rep (F_RT4 rep_123, F_RT4 rep_132, F_RT4 rep_2nd, F_RT4 rep_3rd), which will be described later, determined as the internal winning combination, in the order of pressing determined for each type of the RT4 rep. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Game state transition flow regarding presence/absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the game state based on whether or not the bonus is won/operated, the type of the internal winning combination relating to the replay, and the winning probability thereof, while notifying the stop operation advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the game state regarding presence/absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes between the normal gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of the notification. The general game state is basically a game state (non-ART) in which the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous game state to the player. On the contrary, the ART game state is a game state in which a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state advantageous to the player. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general game state (while sandwiching the bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state advantageous to the player. ..

The general gaming state is a gaming state in which ART is not won in RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the normal game state is composed of a normal game state and CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state and CZ are gaming states in which the destination gaming state is different, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the CZ, and from the CZ to the ART gaming state. Is done.

The normal gaming state is the most unfavorable gaming state in the pachi-slot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to CZ. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, a lottery for shifting to CZ is carried out, and (A) When this lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to CZ.

CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation of shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the CZ to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, the transfer lottery to ART is performed, and (B) When this transfer lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from CZ to the normal game state, and (C) When winning the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the CZ to the ART game state (normal ART or CT) via the ART preparation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the RT4 gaming state is winning the ART, and starts after the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 32, since the RT4 gaming state is to be transferred from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not started immediately even after the ART winning. Absent. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the period until the transition to the RT4 gaming state after the winning of the ART is set as the ART preparation, and the stop operation necessary for shifting to the RT4 gaming state is notified during the ART preparation.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the ART is winning in the RT4 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. Normal ART and CT are game states with different playability, and normal ART is a stop operation advantageous to the player for a predetermined number of games (for example, to display a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out). Is a game state in which a stop operation and a stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 game state are notified), and CT is a notification of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and the addition of the normal ART duration is added. It is a game state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, a game is usually played without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or the general game state. Specifically, in the normal ART, the transfer lottery to the CT is carried out. (D) When the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal ART to the CT. Further, the normal ART is managed the duration, (E) When this duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Note that the management method of the duration of the normal ART is arbitrary, but the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment manages the duration according to the number of games. Of course, instead of the number of games, the duration may be managed based on the number of medals paid out during the normal ART and the difference in the number of medals, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during the normal ART (navi The duration may be managed according to the number of times.

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of CT is managed, and (F) When this duration is over, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from CT to normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 63).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting to the bonus state from the normal game state (normal game state or CZ) and the ART game state (normal ART or CT). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when a winning combination is won in the general game state and the ART game state, the main control board 71 changes the game state from the general game state or the ART game state to the bonus state. To move.

In the bonus state, the lottery for the transition to the ART is performed, and (G) When this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the bonus state to the normal game state (normal game state or CZ). (However, when the ART game state (normal ART or CT) has been shifted to the bonus state, the main control board 71 is changed from the bonus state to the ART game state (normal ART or CT even if the transition lottery is not won). ) To move the game state)). Further, (H) When the transfer lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state is over, the RT1 gaming state is entered, so when the gaming state is transitioned from the bonus state to the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 sets the state of ART preparation. The gaming state is transferred to the ART gaming state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 74.

<Design placement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines a correspondence relationship between 20 symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of symbols are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", "cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. 3C, 3R, in the order of movement in the rotational direction, the correspondence relationship is assigned in which the symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbols located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 represents codes for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are, as described above, “white 7”, “blue 7”, “chili top 1”, “chili top 2”, “chili bottom”, “replay”, “hat”. , “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2”, and “Cactus 3”.

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). For the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2), "00000010" is assigned as data. "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each pattern of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3" (design code 4-10) , “0000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols determined in advance according to the type of privilege (combination), data to be stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a combination of the symbol is displayed. Stipulates the corresponding relationship with the privilege (the number of medals paid out).

In the present embodiment, the winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the activated line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is provided with benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus game (characteristic continuous differential device). In addition, when the symbol combination displayed along the activated line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, a so-called “out” occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the "off" is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination of "off" is defined. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the "combination" item may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "combination".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored, and "data (a bit corresponding to a combination of symbols in 1-byte data) stored in the storage area. Data)" is specified. In this embodiment, by using 22 1-byte storage areas, the combination of the respective symbols is determined. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of storage area 0.

The combination defined in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the activated line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. A combination name according to the role of the combination and the type of symbols forming the combination is defined in each combination.

The payout number defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, when the combination name “C_9 coins A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

Further, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the feature of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 35, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

The combination names “R_RT transition eye A_01” to “R_RT transition eye B_02” are bell spilled eyes. When the spilled bell is displayed along the activated line, the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state (see FIG. 32).

The combination names “C_maintenance rep A_01” to “C_maintenance rep G_01” are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, top line, or cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the activated line, the replay is activated.

Further, the combination names “C_RT2 Lip A_01” and “C_RT2 Lip A_02” are RT2 transition Lips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed in the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state (see FIG. 32).

The combination name “C_RT3 Lip_01” is an RT3 transition Lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state shifts to the RT3 game state (see FIG. 32).

The combination names "C_RT4 Lip A_01" to "C_RT4 Lip D_02" are RT4 transition Lips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT game state is changed to the RT4 game state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination names “C_Chillilip A_01” to “C_1 definite ChileDip D_01” are Chilelip. Chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the Chile symbol is displayed in the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbol “upper dust 1” and the symbol “lower dust” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chile design is a name when the design “Chile top 1” and the design “Chile bottom” are regarded as one design. When the chillip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game is activated.

The combination name “C_Chillilip A_01” among the chilirips is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbols are displayed only on one reel among the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed in the display window 4. Sometimes called "single lip". Further, among the chilirips, the combination names “C_chirilip B_01” and “C_chirilip C_01” are combinations of symbols in which chili symbols are displayed on two reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, and in the following, it may be referred to as "double chili lip." Further, among the chillips, the combination names "C_chillip D_01" to "C_1 definite chillip D_01" are combinations of symbols in which the Chile symbols are displayed on all reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or It is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called mis-pressing), and hereinafter may be referred to as "three consecutive dust lip".

Further, the combination names “C_reach eye lip A_01” to “C_reach eye lip P_02” are reach eye lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye and is a symbol combination in which a special symbol combination is displayed in the display window 4L. For example, the combination name “C_reach eye lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the activated line, the re-game is activated.

Further, the combination names “C_RB combination A_01” to “C_RB combination G_02” are the ninth in BB. When the ninth coin out of the BB is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out. In addition, among the 9 out of the BB, the combination of symbols excluding the combination name “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” is 7 symbols in any of the 5 lines displayed in the display window 4 (the symbol "White 7" or the symbol "blue 7") is a combination of three symbols displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination fails). Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "7 in BB". On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the 5 lines, and in the following, “7 in BB” May be called.

The combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out.

The combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first sheets. When the first coin is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names “C_SP1_01” and “C_SP2_01” are confirmed results. When the confirmed outcome is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out.

The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the activated line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names “C_weak 2 pieces A_01” to “C_weak 2 pieces B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 pieces A_01” to “C_strong 2 pieces C_09” are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the activated line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, an internal lottery table that is referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each winning combination. 39 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 40 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

In the present embodiment, random number values for lottery extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values according to each winning combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred.

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by "lottery value corresponding to each number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it can be seen that the types and winning probabilities of the replays determined as the internal winning combinations are different in each gaming state. As the most characteristic point, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_Chililip (No.25)" to "F_Reach eye Lip D (No.31)" are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, in the RT4 game state, when "F_chiririp (No.25)" to "F_reach-eye lip D (No.31)" are determined as internal winning combinations, peculiar control (described later) Flag conversion), but this specific control will be described later.

In addition, even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, the “F_reach-eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination together with the “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3 to 6, No. 15-18), and “F_reach-eyes Lips A to D” are not independently determined as internal winning combinations. Therefore, when "F_reach eye Lips AD" is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to RT3 game state (a combination of symbols corresponding to "F_reach eye Lips AD" is seen from the player). When displayed), the bonus winning combination (F_BB1, 2) is simultaneously determined as the internal winning combination.

In addition, the RT5 gaming state, which is the state between flags, carries over the bonus-related winning combination as an internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 40, the winning combination relating to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
41 to 46 are comparative tables showing the correspondence relationship with the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the activated line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a symbol combination (combination) can be displayed. The correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 42 to 48 list combinations of all the symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but the circle marks correspond to the winning combinations. Even if a combination of symbols with is attached, it may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially drawn in) is made to differ according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current game state, and in terms of the symbol to be preferentially drawn in, a circle is drawn. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, the correspondence between the combination of the winning combination and the symbols actually stopped and displayed is shown in FIGS. 47 and 48.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during non-flag and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (a part of the combinations is omitted) between the winning combination in the game state excluding the state between flags and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of winning combinations, a "pushing winning combination", which is a combination having different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the order of stop operations (pushing order), is provided. The symbol combination associated with the “press order correct answer” in FIG. 47 is a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the press order, and corresponds to “incorrect press order”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, the correct pressing order is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the “press order correct answer” is displayed. It should be noted that even in the ART game state, the pushing order which is an incorrect answer may be notified, but the details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push forward combination represents the correct push order. Specifically, the end "1st" of the name of the winning combination means that the correct pressing order is for the left reel 3L in the first stop operation, and the end "2nd" of the name of the winning combination is The correct pressing order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the ending "3rd" of the winning combination name indicates that the correct pressing order is the first stop operation for the right reel. It is meant for 3R. Further, the ending "123" of the combination name means that the correct pressing order is "left, middle, right", and the ending "132" of the combination name is the correct pressing order is "left". , Right, middle”, and the ending “213” of the winning combination name means that the correct pressing order is “middle, left, right”, and the ending “231” of the winning combination name. Means that the correct pressing order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 47, the winning combination “F_Chililip” is a winning combination in which the symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 41 of the Chilelip (see FIG. 35). ~ Any one of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in Fig. 46 is displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, refer to Figs. 41 to 46 of the replay (see Fig. 35). Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the activated line. 41 to 46, the combination "F_Chillilip" cannot display the triple chililip ("C_chililip D_01" to "C_1 accurate chililip D_01"), and the single chililip or the double chililip ("C_chililip" is not displayed. It can be seen that only A_01”, “C_chillip B_01”, and “C_chillip C_01”) can be displayed. That is, the winning combination “F_Chillip” is a winning combination that cannot display three consecutive Chilerips.

In addition, the combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” are different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, of the chililip (see FIG. 35). If any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not the correct answer, then FIG. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 46 is displayed along the activated line. It should be noted that referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, it is understood that the combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” can display three consecutive chilirips. That is, the winning combination "F_probable chililip" and "F_1 probable chililip" is a combination that can display three consecutive chilirips.

Further, the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is a combination in which the symbols to be displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach-eye lip ( (See FIGS. 35 and 36 ), any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the replay (FIG. 35)), any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the activated line.

In addition, the pressing order of the correct answer in the part “F_chiririp”, “F_certain chililip”, “F_1 sure chililip” and the part “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” may be arbitrary. In the form, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is the correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, in the game in which the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach-eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

In addition, the combination “F_maintenance rep A” and “F_maintenance rep B” are any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replay (see FIG. 35) regardless of the pressing order are effective lines. Is displayed along with. In addition, the combination “F_maintenance rep_1st” to “F_maintenance rep_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 35). If any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not the correct answer, then the RT2 transition rep (see FIG. 35) is selected. 41 to 46, any of the combinations of displayable symbols are displayed along the activated line.

Further, the combination “F_RT3 Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 Lip_3rd” has different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rep (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the activated line, and if the pushing order is not correct, one of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the activated line. Are displayed along.

Further, the combination “F_RT4 Lip_123” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols to be displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rep (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the activated line, and if the pushing order is not correct, one of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the activated line. Are displayed along.

In addition, the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” is a combination in which the symbols to be displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37). Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the bell spill (see FIG. 35) or the first sheet (see FIGS. 37 and 38) is displayed.

In addition, the combination "F_common bell" is displayed along the activated line, regardless of the order of pressing, among the bells (see FIG. 37), any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. In addition, the combination “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Sabo 2” are any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the cactus (see FIG. 38) along the activated line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

In addition, the combination "weak chili" is displayed along the activated line, regardless of the pressing order, of any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 38). In addition, as for the combination “F_strong chili 1” and “F_strong chili 2”, any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the strong cherry (see FIG. 38) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination in the flags and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in the inter-flag state and a combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state (some winning combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1” during the inter-flag state). “C_BB2”) can be displayed. In FIG. 48, “◯” in “whether or not BB is satisfied” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “x” indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

When BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination other than the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combinations of symbols displayed according to the winning combinations other than the winning combinations are as shown in FIG. For example, in the case of the winning combination “F_BB1+F_Chillirip”, BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of symbols of the corresponding relationship shown in the winning combination “F_Chillirip” of FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, it may be possible to display only the symbol combination displayed when the pressing order is correct, or only the symbol combination that is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect. You can

For example, in the role “F_BB1+F_3 choice bell_1st”, since BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols of the correspondence relationship shown in the role “F_3 choice bell_1st” in FIG. 47 is displayed. May display only the bell that is displayed when the correct pressing order is displayed, and may not display the bell spill or the first page that is displayed when the incorrect pressing order is displayed. Further, in the case of the combination “F_BB1+F_RT3 rep_1st”, only the replay displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rep displayed when the pressing order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the flag-to-flag state, when a bonus winning combination and any one of “out”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2” and “F_special 3” is determined as an internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<abbreviation of winning part>
Heretofore, the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped manner has been described. Next, a data table used when performing various types of lottery in the normal gaming state, the ART gaming state, etc. will be described. However, in the following, the winning combination used when referring to the data table is abbreviated, so the data table concerned The abbreviation of the winning combination will be explained before the explanation. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an abbreviation of a winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), in the following, the combination “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are called the combination “BB”, and the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” are called the combination “push order bell”, The role "F_Common Bell" is called the role "Common Bell", the role "F_Sabo 1" and "F_Sabo 2" is called the role "Cactus", the role "F_Weak Chile" is called the role "Weak Cherry", and the role "F_Strong" "Chile 1" and "F_strong chili 2" are called "strong cherry".

In addition, the winning combination "F_probable chiririp" and "F_1 definite chiririp" are called "win triple win" when the flag conversion lottery is won, and "replay" when the flag conversion lottery is not won. Similarly, the winning combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_leaching-eye lip D” is called a winning combination “reach-eye lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery, and a non-winning winning when the flag conversion lottery is called “replay”.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, any one of the roles “F_probable chilirip”, “F_1 probable chililip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” as an internal winning combination during the RT4 game state. When determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 gives a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) when the flag conversion lottery is won.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the combination of “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 probable chilirip”, a combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chilirips” is displayed when the pushing order is correct, and a combination of “replay” when the pushing order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the information of displaying the combination of the symbols of "three consecutive chililip" by treating the winning combination "F_certain chililip" and "F_1 certain chililip" as the winning combination "three consecutive chililip" (For example, press the button to aim at the Chile pattern). On the other hand, in the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the winning combination “F_probable chilirip” and “F_1 probable chilirip” is treated as a winning combination “replay”, and information for displaying the symbol combination of “replay” is notified (for example, , Informs the pressing order other than the normal pressing).

Similarly, in the combination of "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", a combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed when the pushing order is correct, and a combination of symbols of "replay" when the pushing order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when winning in the flag conversion lottery, the winning combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is treated as the winning portion “reach-eye lip”, and the combination of symbols of the “reach-eye lip” is handled. Notify the information to be displayed (for example, press forward to aim at the symbol "white 7"). On the other hand, in the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" by treating the combination "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" as the role "replay" To inform.

By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed and a special privilege is given. From the pachi-slot machine 1, although a special privilege is given according to the fact that the flag conversion lottery is won, from the player's point of view, the special combination is displayed because the combination of the symbols "3 consecutive chilirips" is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to improve the playability of the pachi-slot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is constant, rather than constant. Stop control (combination of symbols to be displayed) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, so as a method of varying the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given, depending on the state, the winning probability of the combination is made different. A method can also be considered (in the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be made different according to the presence or absence of the bonus operation and the RT gaming state, so for example, only the RT4 gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing another gaming state such as RT6 gaming state or RT7 gaming state is also conceivable. However, since the trigger for changing the winning probability of the winning combination (the trigger for shifting the RT gaming state) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, without changing the winning probability of the winning combination, by performing the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result, the benefit is It is possible to flexibly change the appearance frequency of the given combination of symbols according to the state. That is, in a state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given, and conversely, in a state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, a combination of symbols to which the privilege is given. Can appear less frequently.

In the following, in order to win the flag conversion lottery in the case where the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of “f_probable chililip” and “F_1 probable chililip” is set to “3 consecutive times”. It is sometimes referred to as "Cililip" (or simply converted into "3 consecutive Chilelips"), and when the roles "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations. To win the flag conversion lottery is referred to as converting the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” into “reach eye lip” (or simply converting it to “reach eye lip”). There is.

[Game flow during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a game flow in the normal game state will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, by shifting from the normal gaming state of the general gaming state to the CZ of the general gaming state, and then shifting from the CZ of the general gaming state to the ART gaming state, the general gaming state (non-ART) to the ART gaming state (See FIG. 33). FIG. 50(A) is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from the normal game state of the normal game state to the CZ of the general game state.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), the normal gaming state has a low-probability state and a high-probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state have different expectations for winning the CZ lottery that is performed during the normal gaming state. The low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. In addition, when the CZ lottery performed in the normal game state is won, the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 33).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones with different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone to win the ART lottery without fail, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ to be shifted from the normal game state is randomly selected from these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 50(B) is a diagram showing a game flow when shifting from the general game state CZ1, CZ2 to the ART game state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period in which ranks with different expectations for winning the ART lottery during CZ are promoted, and the second half is a period in which the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the ranks is notified by a battle effect.

During CZ1, six rank modes are used, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues for the first game number (for example, 12 games at maximum), and the promotion lottery of the mode is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

Further, during CZ2, 10 stages of points are used as the rank, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, 15 games at maximum) is continued and the lottery for promotion of points is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character A compete is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character B compete. This battle effect continues for the third number of games (for example, up to 4 games), the win/loss is managed based on the result of the ART lottery, and when the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and the non-win is won. Enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, the ART lottery is performed based on each game and the internal winning combination. When the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the battle effect, the ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle effect is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, in the case of not winning the ART, the player loses in the battle effect in the latter half of the game, and basically the game state thereafter shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, if the player wins the ART, the player wins in the battle effect in the second half, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur, and in this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 50C is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general game state to the ART game state. The CZ3 continues for the fourth game number (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and performs the ART lottery based on each game and the internal winning combination. The CZ3 ends at the time when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional opportunity zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and in this case as well, the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional opportunity zone) via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the fourth game number has passed without winning the ART lottery in the CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51 to FIG. 56, the data table used during the normal gaming state will be described.

<Normal Medium/High Probability Lottery Table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium-high probability random determination table used for the transition random determination in the CZ random determination state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also shifted at the end of the bonus or at the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 51(A) is a normal medium/high probability random determination table used when shifting the random determination state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 51(B) is a normal medium/high probability random determination table used when the lottery state of CZ is shifted at the end of bonus, etc., and is referred to at the time of setting change, at the end of bonus, or at the end of CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 51(A) defines the lottery value information on the CZ random determination state after the transition, in association with the current CZ random determination state and the winning combination.

The various data tables shown below conceptually show information on lottery values. In the figure, “0” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “very low” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0% to less than 1%”. It means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “1% to less than 10%” is defined, and “low” means that the lottery probability is “10%”. Means that a lottery value corresponding to "less than 30%" is defined, "medium" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is defined, “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “extremely high” means lottery corresponding to the lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. The value is defined, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is defined, and "confirmed" means the lottery probability ". It means that the lottery value corresponding to "100%" is defined.

Then, in the various data tables shown below, it is extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, and “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). Internal lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for lottery with the specified lottery value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether so-called "carriage" has occurred). Be seen.

Referring to the normal medium/high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 51(A), when the current CZ random determination state is low probability, it is easy to shift to high probability when the weak cherry is the internal winning combination. .. Further, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it is understood that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, the cactus, the weak cherry, and the strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium/high probability random determination table shown in FIG. 51(B) defines lottery value information about the random determination state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. By referring to the normal medium/high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51B, it is understood that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
52 is a CZ lottery table used for the CZ lottery, and FIG. 52(A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing the CZ lottery based on the internal winning combination during the normal game state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when the CZ lottery is performed to determine whether or not to pull back the CZ when the CZ fails or the ART ends.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A defines the lottery value information regarding the winning/non-winning numbers of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. Referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A, it is understood that when the current CZ lottery state is in the high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52B defines lottery value information regarding winning/non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (at the time of not winning the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2) and at the end of the ART game state, the pullback lottery of the CZ is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52(B).

<Mode up lottery table during CZ1>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table used for CZ1 mode-up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The CZ1 mode up lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55A, which will be described later, in CZ1, the higher the mode, the higher the probability of winning the ART lottery, and when mode C6 is reached, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result “mode 1UP” means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result “mode 2UP” means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of the CZ1 is increased from "2" to "4". In addition, if the winning of the lottery result “mode 6UP_freeze occurrence” is won, a freeze occurs and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<Point lottery table in CZ2>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 medium point lottery table used for point-up lottery of CZ2 in the first half of CZ2. The CZ2 medium lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55B described later, in CZ2, the higher the number of points, the higher the probability of winning the ART lottery, and when the number of points increases to 10, the ART lottery is surely won. In addition, "point 2UP" of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2. For example, when the current point is "2", if the "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is " It will increase from 2” to 4”. In addition, when the lottery result “Point 10 UP_freeze occurrence” is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
55 and 56 are CZ mid ART lottery tables used for ART lottery during CZ, and FIG. 55(A) is a CZ mid ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. 55(B) is a CZ ART ART lottery table (for CZ2) used in the first game of the second half of CZ2, and FIG. 55(C) is a CZ used in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2. FIG. 55D is a CZ middle ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for the ART lottery in CZ3.

The ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 55(A) defines lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current mode. Further, the CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 55B defines lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current point. By referring to the CZ ART ART lottery table (for CZ1) and the CZ ART ART lottery table (for CZ2), it is understood that the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

An ART lottery table during CZ (for both CZ1 and CZ2, during the second half battle) shown in FIG. 55C defines lottery value information about whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the CZ ART ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 during the second half battle), when a rare combination (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning combination in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2, It is understood that there is a probability that the ART lottery will be won.

The ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 56(D) defines lottery value information regarding whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. By referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ3), it is understood that if the ART lottery is won during CZ3, the CT is also won.

[Game flow during normal ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal ART and a CT as an ART game state (see FIG. 33), and CT is a chance zone to be added. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a game is played aiming at the transition to CT during normal ART. FIG. 57(A) is a diagram showing the flow of the lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), the pachi-slot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4, and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuous games in the normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. The CT lottery state is provided with four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during the normal ART. The CT lottery state affects CT lottery performed during the normal ART and flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Normal flag conversion during ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the RT4 game state (that is, in the ART game state), the role “F_certain Chilelip”, “F_1 certain Chilelip”, “F_reach eye Lip A” to “F_reach eye” When any one of the “Dlips D” is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57B is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the pachi-slot machine 1 refers to the ART level and the CT lottery state during the normal ART and performs the flag conversion lottery. As a result, in the case where the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chili lip” and a symbol of “reach eye lip” (for example, Press to give a notice that the desired pattern is aimed at). On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “Replay” (for example, the notification of the pushing order other than the forward pressing) is performed. By performing a stop operation according to the notification by the player, a combination of symbols corresponding to the contents of the notification, that is, a combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" or a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. Is displayed, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of symbols “Replay” is displayed.

[Data table used during normal ART]
Next, the data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 58 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 probable chiririp” are determined as the internal winning combination, first, the flag conversion lottery in the first stage is performed, and when the flag conversion lottery in the first stage is won, After that, the flag conversion lottery in the second stage is performed. When the second-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the winning combination “F_probable chililip” and “F_1 promising chililip” are converted into “three consecutive chililip”, and the first-stage flag conversion lottery or the second-stage flag conversion lottery is performed. If the winning is not won, it is treated as a “replay” without converting the winning combination “F_probable chilirip” and “F_1 probable chililip” into “three consecutive chilirips”.

FIG. 58(A) is an ART mid-flag conversion lottery table used for the first-stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 58(B) is an ART mid-flag conversion lottery table used for the second-stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 58A defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the first-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the flag conversion lottery in the first stage is performed only for the winning combinations “F_Sure Chile Lip” and “F_1 Clear Chile Lip”, and for the winning combinations “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D”. Only the flag conversion lottery in the second stage is performed.

The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 58B defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in the second stage in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In the normal ART, until the CT is won once, the “first time (until once the CT is won)” column of the item “ART level” is referred to.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B, in each of the ART flag conversion lottery tables, random numbers (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used for the first step and the second step. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be simulated as the lottery performed using the random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent years, pachi-slot machines are required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) for payout, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, on the main side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a demand for a mechanism that allows lottery without reducing the game playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, since the probability denominator 65536 can be randomly determined by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery status for the second-stage lottery, it is possible to perform not only the internal winning combination but also the flag conversion lottery according to the current state, so that a variety of playability is provided. The flag conversion lottery you have can be performed.

<ART level decision table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 59(A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level when the ART is won, and FIG. 59(B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59A defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze occurs at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 53, etc.), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines lottery value information about the transfer destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games in the normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games in the normal ART at the time of entering the CT. .. That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuing games, and also the ART level shifts at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium/high probability lottery table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART medium/high probability random determination table for randomizing the CT random determination state during the normal ART. The normal ART medium/high probability random determination table defines the lottery value information about the transfer destination CT random determination state in association with the current CT random determination state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table, the role “3 consecutive chilirip (role “F_ sure chililip” “F_1 promising chililip” is won in the flag conversion lottery when the winning is won)” and the role “reach eye lip (role “F_reach eye lip From "A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" winning in the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning), it is understood that the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls) to "low probability". In the above description, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it may be contrary to the above description that the CT lottery state tends to fall, but FIG. As will be described later, the winning combination “three consecutive chiripip” and “reach-eye lip” must be won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, there is no change in giving a special privilege of CT winning.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 61 is an ART CT random determination table used for CT random determination during normal ART. The ART CT lottery table for ART defines lottery value information about the lottery result of CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, if “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “three consecutive chilirip”, “reach eye lip”, and “BB” are determined as the internal winning combination, the probability denominator 256 is within the range. The CT lottery is performed using a random number value. On the other hand, when other winning combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT random determination is performed using a random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” as CT. “Normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” have different expectations of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional opportunity zone), and “high-accuracy CT” has a larger number of ART games than “normal CT”. Are easily added (see FIG. 66).

<Addition lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 62 is a normal ART mid-time addition lottery table used for extra lottery in which the number of ART games is added during the normal ART. The normal lottery table during the ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the flow of the game during CT will be described. As shown in FIG. 63(A), in the pachi-slot machine 1, CT is performed by one set of eight games. During CT, the number of ART games is added to the lottery based on the internal winning combination. If the additional lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted. Only if the additional lottery is not won, the number of games is subtracted. To be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is ended in eight times in the same set.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B), if the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won during CT (that is, if the winning of the flag conversion lottery upon winning the winning combination “F_probable chililip” is won. ) One set of eight games is reset. For example, in the same set, if the number of ART games that cannot be added is played 7 times, and the game that the number of ART games is not added 1 more time is performed, the CT will end, but the role "3 consecutive chiripuripu" If the winning is won, the CT will be reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game is played in which the number of ART games is not added eight times. Therefore, CT becomes easier to continue as the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 63C is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the winning combination “F_Sure Chilelip” and “F_1 Sure Chilelip” are always converted to the winning combination “Triple Chilelip”. As described above, if the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, when the winning combination "F_probable chililip" or "F_1 probable chililip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is re-issued. Will be set.

On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the flag conversion lottery are controlled for the combinations “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” based on a three-stage table (tables 0-2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(C), table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion into “reach eye lip”, and table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion into “reach eye lip”. Has the highest probability of being converted into a “reach-eye lip”. If the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

As shown in FIG. 63(C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in the high probability CT, the table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67.

<Table lottery table during CT>
FIG. 64 is a during-CT table lottery table for determining a table used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The in-CT table lottery table defines lottery value information about the table used in the flag conversion lottery in association with the ART level and the state such as the type of CT to be executed. The CT table lottery table is referred to when the CT lottery is won and it is decided to shift to CT, or is referred at the start of CT, and determines the table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 65 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. By referring to the CT flag conversion lottery table, it is understood that during CT, the winning combination “F_probable Chilelip” and “F_1 winning Chilelip” are always converted to the winning combination “three consecutive Chilerips”.

<Addition lottery table during CT>
FIG. 66 is an additional lottery table during CT used for additional lottery to add the number of ART games during CT. The additional lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. Note that the winning combinations other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 66 are not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during the normal CT, the number of additional games differs depending on the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won. Specifically, if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, If the winning number of the winning combination “3 consecutive Chilelip” is “9 to 16”, it is easy to determine “20 games” as the number of additional games, and the winning number of winning the winning combination “3 consecutive Chilelip” during the same CT. Is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more" , It is easy to determine “50 games” as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, when the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won during the same CT is “1 to 8 times”, the winning combination “3 consecutive chililip” in the figure is selected. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the winning combination "3 consecutive chililip" in the figure is ". 20 games”. Furthermore, if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive chilirips" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the winning combination "3 consecutive chililip" in the figure are corresponded. The number of additional games will be promoted to "30 games". Similarly, if the number of times the winning combination "3 consecutive Chilelips" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the winning combination "3 consecutive Chilelips" in the figure are supported. Number of additional games to be promoted to “50 games”.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased according to the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive chilirip” is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, CT does not end, and if the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won, CT is reset, so from the player's perspective, CT You can expect to increase the amount of addition per time as you continue, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times that increases the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), so an excessive profit is given to the player. This can be prevented from being given, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 67 is a lottery lottery table in which the number of sets in CT used for lottery is added to the number of sets in which a new CT is added during CT. The number-of-sets-on-CT lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the lottery on which the number of sets is increased, in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, if the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given in association with lottery by adding the set number, the new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed is finished.

It should be noted that the number of times of winning the above-mentioned winning combination "three consecutive chilirips" is to be counted only during the same CT, but this "during the same CT" is when lottery is won in addition to the number of sets performed during CT. It may or may not include the new CT added to the.

[Game flow during bonus state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 68(A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the bonus state during the general game state (not winning the ART), and FIG. 68(B) is the case of shifting to the bonus state during the normal ART. 68C is a diagram showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 68C is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the bonus state is entered during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68(A) to 68(C), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when shifting to the bonus state. At this time, when the special BB is determined, after the bonus state is finished, the process shifts to CT via the ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow is different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 68(A), in the case of shifting from the normal game state to the normal BB, the ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal BB. If this ART lottery is won, after the bonus state is finished, the state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed during the bonus state.

Referring to FIG. 68(B), when the normal ART is changed to the normal BB, the CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. There is a 50% chance that this CT lottery will be won, and if it is won, it will shift to CT after preparing for the ART after the bonus state ends, and if it is not won, it will shift to normal ART after preparing for the bonus state and preparing for the ART. To do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is also performed.

Referring to FIG. 68(C), when the CT is shifted to the normal BB or the special BB, after the bonus state is finished, the state is shifted to CT via the ART preparation. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus state]
Subsequently, a data table used in the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state and defines lottery value information about the bonus type in association with the state before the shift to the bonus state.

<Additional number of ART games in the bonus lottery table>
FIG. 70 is a bonus lottery random number addition table used in the lottery for ART lottery and the number of ART games to be added during the bonus state. The bonus lot ART game number addition lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the ART lottery and the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The bonus lottery addition bonus lottery table is used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the lottery is won in the ART BB in the normal BB after the shift from the normal gaming state). That is, when the number of games to be added is determined to be 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after the winning of the ART, the lottery table for adding the number of bonus ART games is used for the additional lottery for the number of ART games.

<CT lottery table at end of bonus>
FIG. 71 is a bonus-end CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The bonus lot end CT lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery, in association with the bonus type and the game state before shifting to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus lottery CT lottery table shown in FIG. 71, for example, when a normal BB is performed during a normal ART, it is found that there is a 50% probability of winning the CT at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, an exceptional game flow in the normal game state will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 basically aims at the ART gaming state by shifting from the normal gaming state to the CZ during the general gaming state and winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the RT gaming state is realized by notifying the user during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 72, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed. doing. As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation by the player, so that the notification is not performed. , It may happen to shift to RT4 gaming state.

In addition, in the RT4 gaming state, the combination “F_reach-eyes lip A” to “F_reach-eyes lip D” may be determined as an internal winning combination, so even in the general gaming state (non-ART), Reach eyes (reach eye lip) to which special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the game is accidentally transitioned to the RT4 game state during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" can be displayed. When it becomes a state, it is possible to shift to the ART game state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination in the general game state and the RT4 game state, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and If the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is given and the right of ART is given. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the symbol combination of "Replay" is performed and the symbol combination of "Reach eye lip" is controlled not to be displayed.

<Non-art flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed in the normal game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main control]
In a pachi-slot machine, conventionally, information of a stop operation (pushing order, etc.) is notified under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side in an ART machine, but whether or not there is a notification to the player's benefit ( In recent years, the main (main control board 71) side that manages the profit of the player is required to give the notification because it affects the so-called payout. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the information of the stop operation, and the information of the stop operation is notified under the control of the main side. I have decided.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 informs the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and “1” to “3” respectively indicate the types of reels performing the first stop operation. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the inner reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

Further, "4" to "9" indicate the push order informing each, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" indicates the push order is ". "6" means that the pressing order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the pressing order is "middle, right, left". "8" means that the pressing order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the pressing order is "right, middle, left".

Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying a bonus winning combination, and "10" means a symbol combination "C_BB1" including "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means a symbol combination “C_BB2” composed of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”.

Here, although the numbers of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly understand the notification contents. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to comprehend the content of the notification just by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the contents of the stop operation are notified also on the sub side in addition to the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the display unit 100 controlled by the sub control board 72, and notifies the information of the stop operation under the control of the sub side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, the main side displays “1” on the instruction monitor, and the sub side displays the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. "1" is displayed above to inform that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the pressing order “middle, left, right”, “6” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “1” is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" above the left reel 3L and "3" above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is "middle, left, right". When “F_BB1” is determined as the internal winning combination, “10” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 74(A), during the ART preparation, “bell navigation”, “maintenance lip navigation”, “RT3 transition lip navigation” and “RT4 transition lip navigation” are performed under the control of the main side. "Bernavi" informs the combination "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_1rd" of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of "bell". Further, the "maintenance lip navigation" informs the combination "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of "replay". In addition, the "RT3 transition Lip Navi" notifies the combination "F_RT3 transition Lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition Lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "RT3 transition Lip". Further, the "RT4 transition Lip Navi" informs the combination "F_RT4 transition Lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition Lip_3rd" of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of "RT4 transition Lip".

The timing of notification on the main side is arbitrary as long as it is at least during one game of notification. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is received, or the main side may be notified when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when either of the above is accepted. On the other hand, it is preferable that the sub side gives the notification at least before the first stop operation. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification is made on both the main side and the sub side when the start operation is accepted or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating. Thereby, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the main-side instruction monitor and the sub-side display unit 100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74(B), during the ART game state, "bell navigation", "maintenance lip navigation", "RT3 transition lip navigation" and "RT4 transition lip navigation" are performed under the control of the main side. In addition, during the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and based on the lottery result, a push for displaying a combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chili lip”, “reach eye lip” or “replay” The order is notified, but this notification is performed only on the sub side, not on the main side.

As described above, the combination of the symbols “3 consecutive chili lip” and “reach eye lip” is related to the granting of a special privilege, so the presence or absence of the notification may affect the profit (ball payout) of the player. Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, actually, a special privilege is given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of symbols displayed does not affect the given bonus. That is, when the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the symbol combination of "Replay" is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In this case, even if the combination of the symbols "three consecutive chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (ball payout), the sub monitor is not notified on the main side instruction monitor. The display unit 100 gives notification only on the side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 74(C) and (D), during the RT5 game state (state between flags), a notification is made to aim at a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74(C), when the hand “F_BB1” is carried over, “white 7 navigation” is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74(D), the hand “F_BB2” is carried over. If so, perform “Blue 7 Navi”. The "white 7 navi" informs the winning combination "F_BB1" of information on the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols "C_BB1", and the "blue 7 navi" responds to the winning combination "F_BB2". Information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols "C_BB2" is notified.

Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the bonus winning combination and any one of the “off”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations. If the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination along with the bonus winning combination, it is not possible to display the BB winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 74(C) and (D), when the main control board 71 performs control on the main side, it is different from the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus, “off”, “F_special winning combination 1”, and “F_special winning combination”. Only when either "2" or "F_special combination 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination of the bonus can be won.

The main control board 71 may perform “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after notifying that the winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying a bonus confirmation screen or lighting a bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when a combination related to a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games can be performed, and a bonus confirmation screen can be displayed according to the result of this continuous effect. It is generally done. If "white 7 navi" is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be understood on the way, which may be less interesting. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is given. It should be noted that any method can be used to allow the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made.

As one technique, when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus notification, and after the number of games is exhausted, the “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7” A method of performing "navi" can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required to notify the bonus, the main control board 71 notifies the sub-control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after the bonus winning combination is not carried over and the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and after the counting result reaches a predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the winning combination and any of the "off", "F_special combination 1", "F_special combination 2", and "F_special combination 3" are determined as internal winning combinations I do.

Further, as another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side rather than the sub side can be considered. More specifically, if the main control board 71 decides the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over, the main control board 71 determines the effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed on the display unit 100. It is determined and the sub-control board 72 is notified. The sub control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is performed can be grasped on the main side.

Of course, the timing at which the bonus notification is made may be made to be comprehensible on the main side by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can receive. .. For example, a signal accompanying a stop operation can be received by the main control board 71, and thus a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than the normal push) is performed in a state where the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In case of failure, bonus notification may be given. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 obtains the information about the internal winning combination and the information about the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (the internal winning combination “the winning combination”). , Bonus operation is performed when the stop operation is “other than pressing forward”). Since such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped.

[Explanation of operation of main control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91.

<Main operation process of pachi-slot controlled by main CPU>
First, the procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 75 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 31 performs initialization processing when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally or the setting has been changed appropriately, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this processing, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this processing, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table (FIG. 39, FIG. 40) corresponding to the current game state, and randomly selects a winning combination to be determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” have been determined as internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the winning combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” is determined as an internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or if it is determined in S5 that the winning combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as internal winning combinations (NO), the main CPU 31 continues by the state A game control process is performed (S7).

Then, the main CPU 31 performs main side navigation control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub control board 72. Further, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 executes reel stop initialization processing which will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 (S9). In this processing, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Then, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and sends it to the sub control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for rendering such as an internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests rotation start of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and thereafter, Controlled to maintain a constant speed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 executes reel stop control processing described later with reference to FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, the reel stop control information determined in S9 is used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R, respectively. It

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, depending on the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of re-playing. Give profit. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates winning operation command data and sends it to the sub control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the activated line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process described later with reference to FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and the end of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs RT check processing described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls to shift the RT game state based on the combination of displayed symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 executes a CZ/ART end time process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 carries out the CZ pullback lottery. When the CZ/ART end time process is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the process to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the control processing for each state will be described with reference to FIG. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S31). If it is in the RT4 game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later with reference to FIG. 77 (S32).

Subsequent to the process of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). If it is in the normal game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal start process (to be described later with reference to FIG. 78) (S34), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a during-CZ start process described later in FIG. 79 (S36), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current game state is the normal ART (S37). When it is in the normal ART (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 83, and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current game state is CT (S39). If it is in CT (YES), the main CPU 31 then performs the in-CT start process (S40), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 84, and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current game state is the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a during-BB start process described later in FIG. 85 (S42), and ends the state-based control process.

On the other hand, when the current game state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-based control processing. For example, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation when the ART is being prepared.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether it is the time to start CT (S50). When it is the time to start CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the in-CT flag conversion table lottery table (FIG. 64 ), and randomly selects and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery in CT. Yes (S51).

Following the process of S51, or when it is not the time to start CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART. , The ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 65) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 carries out a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). When the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this processing, for example, when the winning combination "F_1 definite Chilelip" is determined as an internal winning combination, the winning combination "F_1 definite Chilelip" is treated as a winning combination "three consecutive Chilelips".

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current game state is non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state is accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the general gaming state (non-ART) is not notified. judge. When the current game state is not in ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), and subsequently sets ART preparation in the next game (S58), and the flag. The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current game state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

If the flag conversion lottery is not won in S54 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the flag maintaining process (S59), and ends the flag conversion process. In the flag maintaining process, for example, when the winning combination “F_1 definite relipping” is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination “F_1 definite relipping” is processed as the winning combination “replay”.

<Normal start processing>
Next, the normal start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the normal start process, the main CPU 31 first refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52(A) to perform the CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery is won (S62). When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the type of CZ that is won for the next game (S63), and subsequently sets the CZ game number counter to a value corresponding to the type of CZ that is won. Yes (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter for counting the duration of CZ. When the CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability random determination table of FIG. The lottery state of the CZ lottery is selected based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transfer lottery (S66), and the normal start process is terminated.

<Processing during CZ start>
Next, referring to FIG. 79, the CZ start processing will be described. In the CZ start process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ1 (S71). If it is in CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ1 (CZ2) in-process described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S72), and ends the CZ-in-start process.

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is in CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ1 (CZ2) in-process described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S74), and ends the CZ-in-start process. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in rank (mode or point) with different expectation of winning the ART lottery, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing in CZ1 (CZ2) by one processing.

On the other hand, when it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ3 in-process described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S75), and ends the CZ-in-start process.

<CZ1 (CZ2) Medium Processing>
Next, the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). The main CPU 31 shifts the processing to S82 if it is the first half (YES), and shifts the processing to S91 of FIG. 81 if it is not the first half (is the second half) (NO).

In the case of the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 middle mode up lottery table (FIG. 53) and performs the mode up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 54), and performs the point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze is won in the lottery in S82 (S84). If the player has won the freeze (YES), the main CPU 31 performs freeze processing for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the ART set number and the CT set number (S85). In this processing, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). When the freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and finishes processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (first half) by 1 (S87). Then, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). When the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the CZ1 (CZ2) mid-process. To do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 81, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). In the case of the first game of the second half, the ART lottery table during CZ (FIGS. 55(A) and (B)) is referred to, and the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery is won (S93).

When winning the ART lottery (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and randomly draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). , And set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or if the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets “4” to the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and sets “3” to the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. ”Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or if it is not the one game in the latter half of the game in S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ-ART ART lottery table (FIG. 55(C)), and sets the internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery (S96), it is determined whether or not the ART lottery is won (S97). When this ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and randomly draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or if the ART lottery has not been won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (latter half) by 1 (S99). Then, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). When the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) mid-process.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 then finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and finishes processing during CZ1 (CZ2). .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets a CZ failure time (S103), and ends the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing.

<Treatment during CZ3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the CZ3 middle processing will be described. In the CZ3 mid-process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ during-arts lottery table (FIG. 56(D)) to perform the ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and whether or not this ART lottery is won. It is determined whether or not (S122).

When winning the ART lottery (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a freeze is won in the ART lottery in S121 (S124). If the player has won the freeze (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game (S125).

Subsequent to the processing of S125, or if the freeze is not won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)) to randomly draw the ART level. And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 finishes the CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S127), and finishes the process during the CZ3.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently decrements the CZ game number counter by 1 (S128). Then, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). When the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ3 mid-process.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number, and randomly selects and sets the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(A)). (S130). Then, the main CPU31 finishes CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and finishes processing during CZ3.

<Normal start-up processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the processing at the start during the normal ART will be described. In the normal ART start-time processing, first, the main CPU 31 increments the ART continuous game number counter by 1 (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games in which the normal ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART end game number counter for counting the number of games in which the normal ART can continue is provided. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuing game number counter with the value of the ART ending game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter, sets the ART gaming state. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61), performs the CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not this CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). When winning the CT lottery (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the CT set number and sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and subsequently, the type of the next game is won. CT is set (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59(B)), and refers to the ART continuous game number counter. Based on the value of, the ART level is randomly selected and set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART medium/high probability random determination table (FIG. 60), and randomly determines and sets the transfer destination CT random determination state based on the current CT random determination state and the internal winning combination (S147). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal lottery lottery table during the ART (FIG. 62), performs the lottery lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the extra lottery is won. The determination is made (S149). When the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART number game for ending ART (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or if the additional lottery has not been won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently causes the value of the ART continuing game number counter to reach the value of the ART ending game number counter. It is determined whether or not (S151). When the value of the ART continuing game number counter has not reached the value of the ART ending game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the normal ART start time process.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the number of ART sets (S152), and then, when the ART ends. The process is set (S153), and the processing at the start during normal ART is completed.

<Processing at the start during CT>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the processing at the start during CT will be described. In the start processing during CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 66), performs the additional lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and adds it to the additional lottery. It is determined whether or not the winning is won (S162).

When the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART number game for ending ART (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination “3 consecutive chili lip” is won during the same CT is increased, the additional amount per one time is increased.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the winning combination “three consecutive Chilelip” (that is, whether the winning combination is converted into the winning combination “three consecutive Chilelip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 77) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination “three consecutive chilirip” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and finishes the CT start process. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination “three consecutive chiripuripu” (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during start during CT.

In S162, if the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the CT number of sets extra lottery table (FIG. 67) to determine the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. The additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery for this CT set number has been won (S167). When the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing during the start during CT.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery of the CT set number has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). When the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT start processing.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the CT set number is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CT game number counter to 8 (S173), and ends the CT start process. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets normal ART in the next game (S174), and ends the start processing during CT.

<Processing during BB start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the processing during the BB start will be described. In the BB start process, the main CPU 31 first refers to the bonus bonus ART game number addition lottery table (FIG. 70) and performs the ART game number addition lottery based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won (S182). When the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART game number counter for ending ART (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB start processing. On the other hand, if the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the BB start processing.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initialization process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop initialization process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to a spinner stop initialization table (not shown), and acquires a spinner stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Then, the main CPU 31 refers to the turning cylinder stop initial setting table, and acquires each information based on the turning cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires, for example, various kinds of information associated with the number for turning cylinder stop, such as determination data by pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of all the symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initialization process. The stop button non-operation counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that are not stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control processing>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. When determining that the valid stop button is not pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 stores a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (Fig. (Not shown) and (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressed order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Manage the order of stop operations (push order) with.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (( S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 31 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). In this sliding frame number determination processing, the number of sliding frames defined at the stop start position is determined based on reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the spinning cylinder stop initialization table based on the internal winning combination. Processing.

Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 33. Generation processing is executed (S167). The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position in which any one of the predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces is added to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the rotation of the reel stops Is.

Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes a symbol code storage process (S210). In this symbol code storing process, the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the spinning reel is acquired.

Next, the main CPU31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storing process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs control change processing (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used to stop the reels is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not the signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), it sends a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). If it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216) and the process of step S201. In this attraction-in priority storage processing, the attraction-in priority rankings of all the symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R are determined. On the other hand, when determining that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Next, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). When in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 continues from the BB middle payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state, from the winning determination medal payout process (S13 in FIG. 75). The payout number of medals paid out in is subtracted (S222).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB medium payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). When the BB medium payout number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is ended, while when the BB medium payout number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 continues, Processing at the end of the bonus is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag to ON.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of bonus (FIG. 71), performs the CT lottery at the end of bonus (S225), and determines whether or not this CT lottery is won (S226). In the case of winning the CT lottery, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the CT set number (S227). When the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets and 1 is also added to the number of ART sets in S227.

Following the processing of S227, or if the lottery for CT has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S229), and performs the BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium/high probability random determination table (FIG. 51(B)) to randomly determine and set the random determination state of CZ (S231), and ends the BB check process.

If the bonus state is not in effect in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of symbols BB (C_BB1, 2,) is displayed (S232). When the symbol combination of BB is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the symbol combination of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the bonus type random determination table (FIG. 69), and randomly selects and sets the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs bonus start time processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start time process, the main CPU 31 performs various processes such as starting a bonus operation and setting a bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the RT5 gaming state (S241). When in the RT5 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while when not in the RT5 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 continues in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

When it is in the RT0 game state in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell crevice" is displayed (S243). When the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when the "bell spilled eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines Then, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to ON, the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). If the RT1 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S246). When the "bell spill" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT1 gaming state flag, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Then, the RT check process is terminated (S247).

On the other hand, when the "bell spill" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the RT1 gaming state has passed 20 games (S248). When 20 games have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while when 20 games have elapsed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game state flag and RT1 The game state is shifted to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When in the RT2 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination of “RT3 shift rep” is displayed (S251). When "RT3 shift rep" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when "RT3 shift rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines Then, the RT3 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT2 gaming state flag is turned OFF, the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state (S252), and the RT check process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the RT3 gaming state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell sloping eyes" or "RT2 shift lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spill" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming status flag to ON and turns off the RT3 gaming status flag, and the RT2 gaming status is changed to the RT2 gaming status. The state is shifted to (S263), and the RT check process ends.

On the other hand, when neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. Yes (S264). If "RT4 transition rep" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT4 transition rep" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines Subsequently, the RT4 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT3 gaming state flag is turned OFF, and the RT3 gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 determines the CT set number. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

When the CT set number is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the CT set number is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the normal game to the next game, sets the ART end game number counter to a predetermined value (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

On the other hand, when it is not in the RT3 gaming state in S261 (NO), it is in the RT4 gaming state, so the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not (S270). When neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the RT check process, while "bell spilled eye" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed. When displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT4 gaming state flag, shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and performs RT check processing. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ/ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the CZ/ART end processing will be described. In the CZ/ART end processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ has failed or the ART has ended (S281). If neither CZ failure nor ART termination (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ/ART termination processing, while CZ failure or ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52(B)), and performs the CZ pull-back lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pull-back lottery is won (S283).

When the draw-back lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the type of CZ that was won in the next game (S284), and sets a value corresponding to the type of CZ that was won in the CZ game number counter. Then (S285), the CZ/ART end processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the draw-back lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state to the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium/high probability random determination table (FIG. 51(B)), and randomly determines and sets the random determination state of CZ (S287), and ends the CZ/ART end processing.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

<Sub navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub-side navigation control processing, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data is included in the received start command data.

When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub-side navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). Referring to FIG. 74, for example, when the sub CPU 81 acquires navigation data “4”, it sets navigation data for notifying the sub-side navigation data of the pressing order “left, middle, right”. To do. Thereby, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

On the other hand, when the navigation data has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to perform navigation when, for example, the flag conversion lottery is performed in the main control board 71, or when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the main control board 71. To determine. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine from the various information included in the start command data whether or not navigation is necessary. ..

When it is determined that the navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub navigation control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub navigation control process. For example, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub CPU 81 displays the navigation data for displaying the symbol combination of “3 consecutive Chile Lips”. (For example, press the navigation data to aim at the Chile pattern to set the navigation data), and the winning combination "F_Sure Chile Lip" has been determined as the internal winning combination, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the "Replay" symbol is selected. The navigation data for displaying the combination (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than the normal pressing) is set. Accordingly, even when the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side can notify the content of the stop operation independently.

<Player registration processing>
Next, the player registration processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is accepted on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is accepted on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub-display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation is accepted. To do.

When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, when the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 enables the first sub display device 201 to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29). The display screen of 201 is controlled.

On the other hand, when the registration operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation is accepted (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration deletion operation has been accepted. When the registration deletion operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201, and the first sub display is disabled. Control the display screen of the device 201.

<History management processing>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires a game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322), and ends the history management process. The sub CPU 81 can grasp, for example, the type of winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of the symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, the internal winning combination is determined). It is possible to understand whether or not there is a winning of a role. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current game state and the transition state of the game state from the start command data, for example. From the game results obtained from the various command data, the sub CPU 81 changes, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (number of games), the number of CZs, the number of CZ successes, the number of winnings of each combination, and the winning probability. It is possible to manage various game histories.

[Switching display screen of first sub display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a method of switching the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95(A) is a transition example of the display screen of the first sub display device 201 in the situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95(B) is the player registration state is set. It is an example of a transition of the display screen of the 1st sub display 201 in a situation.

As shown in FIG. 95(A), when the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu. The screen 212 and the menu screen 212 are controlled so as to be transitable only between various display screens that can transit. Specifically, the sub-control board 72, based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation on a predetermined button or a swipe operation on the display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a, the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to be impossible. That is, when the player registration state is not set, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub display device 201.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95(B), when the player registration state is set, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. In addition to the various display screens that can be changed from the menu screen 212, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are also controlled to be changeable. That is, the sub control board 72 controls so that not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be displayed based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201a. Thereby, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub display device 201.

As shown in FIG. 95(B), the order of transition of the display screens among the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be directly transitionable to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be transitionable to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only through the menu screen 212. Good.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the top screen 211 cannot directly transit to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only through the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212, it is possible to transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215.

Here, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information indicating the result of the game that the player has a strong interest during the game, which is the game history, is calculated from the related information that is not related to the result of the game such as the payout arrangement and the volume adjustment. Display independently. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to transit to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 without requiring a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 when the player registration state is set. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to facilitate access to information (game history) that the player desires to confirm in the situation where the player registration state is set.

On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 does not allow the transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the swipe operation not on the menu display does not allow the transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation for transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be treated as a hidden command in the situation where the player registration state is set. For a player, the player's own knowledge of the pachi-slot machine 1 allows him to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players who have less knowledge, so he can play the game more advantageously than the other player. As a result, it can be expected that the game will be actively played.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 transit to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the return button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is transited from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). If a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the game screen automatically changes to the top screen 211 regardless of the player's operation (automatic transition).

More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in a state where the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (the operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the medal insertion slot 22 to place medals). When the input operation is performed, the screen automatically changes to the top screen 211. In addition, in the state where it is highly probable that an internal winning combination is determined as a winning combination related to the replay that operates the replay, such as the ART game state (high-rep state), the medal is automatically generated by the operation of the replay accompanying the replay winning. As a result, the chances of displaying the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited in the high-rip state. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a medal is automatically inserted by the operation of the replay, when the start operation is performed instead of the insertion of the medal, the top screen is automatically displayed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Transition to 211.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the replay operation is being performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are automatically changed to the top screen 211, and the replay operation is performed. If is not performed, when the insertion operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are automatically changed to the top screen 211.

(Display the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen according to the menu)
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, from the various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212, The top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is manually or automatically transitioned. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, top button) is displayed on the various display screens. , A return button), the display screen is transited from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined time elapses while displaying various display screens, the screen automatically changes to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time to transit to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is changed according to the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, it may be adjusted to an unintended volume by an erroneous operation, and the erroneous operation may make other players uncomfortable. Since there is a possibility that it will end up, the screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

In other words, various display screens are set with the time to transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212), and the volume adjustment screen is set with a shorter time than other display screens. The registration screen is set to have a longer time than other display screens.

(Function to select whether to operate the menu)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the player transitions from the menu screen 212 to a registration screen, an explanation screen, an array payout screen, a reach screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen, so that various types of display screens can be displayed. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions selectable by the player may be restricted according to the settings on the game store side.

For example, the game shop can disable the volume control by the player by restricting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (eg, not displaying the volume button 212g on the menu screen 212). ..

[Modification of First Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Next, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game during normal ART and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when the advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, it is decided to immediately shift from the next game to the advantageous state. In a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control may not be performed immediately, but the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games have been played. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called aura game. In this modified example, for example, when the CT lottery is won during the normal ART, the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches the predictive game a predetermined number of times rather than performing the CT immediately will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96(A), during the normal ART, the CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination by using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61). If this CT lottery is won, a lot of lottery for CT lottery is performed on the main side (main control board 71) until the player wins CT, which is an advantageous state for the player. .. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine an internal winning combination, and also serves as an internal winning combination "F_ sure chililip", "F_1 sure chililip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip A". When either "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58).

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, during the sign of CT after winning the CT lottery, the CT based on the winning combination after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the winning combination “three consecutive chiripip” and the winning combination “reach eye lip”). The lottery and other lottery will not be performed to give a privilege to the player. Then, during this CT sign, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, in the case where the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the information for displaying the symbol combination of "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won. , Information for displaying the symbol combination of "Replay" is displayed on the display unit 100.

As described above, in the recent pachi-slot machines, it is required that the lottery that affects the player's profit (ball payout) is performed on the main side. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the lottery for the flag conversion lottery is performed. A period during which the result does not have any effect on the profit of the player (preceding CT) is provided, and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. As a result, for example, in a situation in which a privilege of CT sign has been decided, it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special symbol combination "reach-eye lip", and the variation of the symbol combination is increased. Therefore, improvement in playability can be expected.

Note that FIG. 96B is a flag conversion lottery table during the CT sign used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge board 82. The flag conversion lottery table in the sign of CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table during the CT sign, during the CT sign, the role “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is converted to the role “reach-eye lip” with a very high probability. I understand. As a result, when the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination in the CT sign, a combination of symbols of “reach-eye lip” is displayed with high probability. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that he is in the omen. It should be noted that, again, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is issued, but the privilege is not given.

Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the sign of CT may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during the period that does not affect the profit of the player as in this modification, the main side is selected. This is preferable because the data capacity and the processing load can be reduced.

<Another example of the pressing sequence for displaying 3 consecutive chili lip>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the winning combination "F_ sure chillip" and "F_1 sure chillip" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols "three consecutive chillips" is displayed. If the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed (Fig. 47). In addition, it is assumed that the correct order for pressing the winning combination “F_certain Chilelip” and “F_1 certain Chilelip” is “forward pressing”.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chiriripu” and “F_1 Certain Chiriripu” are determined as the internal winning combination, the number of types of symbol combinations displayed at the time of an incorrect answer in the pressing order is increased. , The order of pressing the correct answer is different for each of the roles “F_certain Chilelip” and “F_1 sure Chilelip”.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(A), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the winning order of the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” is “forward pressing (first stop operation is left reel. 3L)”, and the incorrect pressing order is “middle press (reel 3C where the first stop operation is middle)” and “reverse press (first stop operation is the right reel 3R)”. And, in the case of the combination "F_Sure Chiriripu", the combination of symbols of "3 consecutive chiriripu" is displayed when pressed forward, the combination of symbols of "Replay" is displayed when "mid-pressed", and "reverse press" In the case of "", a combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chili lip" is displayed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, in the case of the role “F_1 definite Chilelip”, the correct pressing order is “reverse pressing”, and the incorrect pressing order is “forward pressing” and “middle pressing”. And And, the combination of symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed when the hand "F_1 probability chili lip" is pressed backward, and the combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed when "middle pressed", and "forward press" In the case of "", a combination of symbols of "2 consecutive chili lip" is displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, when one of the winning combinations “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 promising chililip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the type of winning combination that is “forward-pressed” is selected. Depending on the type of winning combination, "3 consecutive chili lip" or "2 consecutive chili lip" is displayed according to the type of winning combination. .. On the other hand, if any of the winning combination "F_ sure chiririp" or "F_1 sure chiririp" is decided as the internal winning combination, "middle press" will result in a combination of the symbols of "replay" regardless of the type of winning combination. Is displayed.

By doing in this way, for example, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” or “F_1 probable chilirip” is determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) that aim at the chile symbol are possible. Specifically, it is possible to perform both "navigation to push Chile pattern by pushing forward" and "navigation to push Chile pattern by pressing backward". In addition, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “Navigating the Chile symbol by pressing forward” is the navigation for displaying “3 consecutive Chile Lips” and “Reverse pressing”. The "navigation aiming at Chile pattern" is a navigation for not displaying "three consecutive Chilelips" (two consecutive Chilelips are displayed). On the other hand, when the winning combination "F_1 Sure Chiririp" is decided as the internal winning combination, "Navigating the Chile pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for not displaying "3 consecutive chilirips". The "navigation that aims at Chile pattern by pressing" is a navigation for displaying "three consecutive Chilelips" (two consecutive Chilelips are displayed).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and the navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

FIG. 97(B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side during normal ART and the navigation on the sub side. During the normal ART, when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” or “F_1 probable chiririp” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-step flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery.

Specifically, in the case of non-winning at the time of the flag conversion lottery of the first step of the two-step flag conversion lottery, the sub control board 72 performs “replay navigation”. In this "replay navigation", the sub control board 72 informs the player to press the middle button. As shown in FIG. 97(A), the combination of the symbols "Replay" is displayed when the player presses the middle button regardless of whether the winning combination is "F_certain Chilelip" or "F_1 certain Chilelip".

In addition, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won in the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub control board 72 carries out “Chillip Lip Navi”. In this "Chililip fanning navigation", the sub-control board 72, when the winning combination "F_Sure Chilirip" is an internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 informs the player that he/she will press the Chile pattern by pressing it backwards, and the winning "F_1 Sure Chilelip" is inside. If it is a winning combination, the player will be notified to press the Chile pattern by pressing the button normally. As shown in FIG. 97(A), the combination of symbols of "two consecutive chilirips" is displayed when the hand "F_certain chililip" is pushed backwards and when the hand "F_1 sure chililip" is pushed forward. Will be.

Further, when both the first and second stages of the flag conversion lottery are won, the sub-control board 72 carries out “chilly lip complete navigation”. In this "Chililip complete navigation", the sub-control board 72, if the winning combination "F_ Sure Chilirip" is an internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 informs the player that he/she can press the Chile symbol to press the "F_1 Sure Chilelip" inside. If it is a winning combination, it will notify you so that you can aim for the Chile pattern by pressing it backwards. As shown in FIG. 97(A), the combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" is displayed in any case when the hand "F_certain chili lip" is pushed forward and when the hand "F_1 sure chili lip" is pushed backward. Will be.

As described above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (though the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, the combination of symbols displayed as a result affects the profit. The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor) but is performed only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this respect, as in this modified example, not only the “Chililip complete navigation” but also the “Chililip incentive navigation” are performed together, so that it is possible to perform navigation that does not affect profits in various ways on the sub side. Is improved.

[Effect of pachi-slot machine]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Management of duration during CT)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, a CT is provided as an additional chance zone for extending the duration of the normal ART, and the number of ART games is increased based on the internal winning combination in the CT. CT is performed by a set of 8 games, but if the number of ART games can be added during CT, the number of games is not subtracted, and only when the number of games cannot be added, the number of games is subtracted. .. The player does not know how long the CT will continue, and since the CT will not end as long as the addition is performed, the interest in the game during the CT can be enhanced.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1, if an addition is made in response to the combination “three consecutive chirips” during CT, one set of eight games is reset. As a result, even if the CT is about to end, the CT will be restarted from the beginning by the addition according to the role "three consecutive chillips", so there is a strong interest in the game during the CT. It is possible to continue playing the game without being bored because it becomes a hug, and to enhance the interest of the game during CT.

In addition, the addition according to the winning combination "three consecutive chilirips" is performed only when the winning combination "F_probable chiririp" and "F_1 probable chilirip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the winning is performed in the flag conversion lottery. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given to the player, and it is possible to balance the profit of the player and the game shop. In the pachi-slot machine 1 described above, during CT, the flag conversion lottery for the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 probable chililip” is surely won (see FIG. 65), but the winning probability is only an example. It does not prevent appropriate adjustment depending on the profit balance of the player and the game store.

(Number of additional games based on the role "3 consecutive chiririp" in CT)
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the number of additions based on the combination “three consecutive chirips” during CT exceeds a certain number, the number of games to be added per one time is increased. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, CT does not end, and if the winning combination “3 consecutive chilirip” is won, CT is reset, so from the player's perspective, CT You can expect to increase the amount of addition per time as you continue, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times that increases the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), so an excessive profit is given to the player. This can be prevented from being given, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

(Bonus notification on the main side)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination “10” (or “11”) is uniquely corresponded to on the instruction monitor of the information display device 14. By displaying, bonus notification is given on the main side. Here, in the pachi-slot machine, the priority of symbols to be drawn is usually determined, and when the combination of the bonus and the other combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the bonus is determined by the priority. There are some cases where you can draw in a combination of symbols depending on, and sometimes you cannot draw in.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and one of the "missing", "F_special winning combination 1", "F_special winning combination 2", and "F_special winning combination 3". In the case, it is possible to pull in a combination of symbols according to the winning combination, but if another winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, pull in a combination of symbols according to the winning combination. I can't. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, an instruction is given only when a bonus-related role and any one of the "missing", "F_special winning combination 1", "F_special winning combination 2", and "F_special winning combination 3" are determined as internal winning combinations. The display of "10" (or "11") is displayed on the monitor. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination of the bonus can be won.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, the winning combination and any one of the “missing”, “F_special winning combination 1”, “F_special winning combination 2”, and “F_special winning combination 3” are related The instruction monitor does not display "10" (or "11") until the predetermined number of games have passed since the winning combination was first won, and the instruction monitor is provided on the condition that the predetermined number of games have passed. "10" (or "11") is displayed.

For example, there is a case where an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is performed over a plurality of times of games is triggered by winning a winning combination, but during the continuous effect, "10" (or "is displayed on the instruction monitor. If it is displayed as "11"), the meaning of the continuous production may be diminished and the interest may be spoiled. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the instruction monitor is not performed until the predetermined number of games have passed, and the display is performed on the instruction monitor after the predetermined number of games have passed, so that the effect effect is obtained. The bonus can be notified on the main side without damaging it.

(Notification performed by the main/sub side and notification by the sub side alone)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of types of winning combinations having different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the mode of stop operation (pushing order) are provided (see FIG. 47), and the symbols to be displayed are also included in these multiple types of winning combinations The combination includes a combination that gives different benefits, and a combination that gives the same benefits even if the combination of symbols displayed is different.

For example, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on whether the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed or the combination of symbols "Bell" is displayed, and the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed. Since it is different whether or not the transition of the RT game state is performed in addition to the operation of the replay, depending on whether the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed or not, the role "F_3 choice bell_1st" or The role “F_maintenance lip_1st” is a role that gives different benefits depending on the combination of symbols to be displayed. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol combination of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed and the case where the symbol combination of "replay" is displayed, both of them only perform the re-game operation, and thus the role "F_ The “probable chili lip” is a role that gives the same privilege even if the combination of symbols displayed is different (note that the hand “F_certain chili lip”, the privilege to be given differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. , The combination of symbols displayed does not affect the benefits to be given).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the main side and the sub side perform the notification about the combination of the symbols to be displayed, which gives different benefits, while the combination of the symbols to be displayed is the same. The role of giving the privilege is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side, but is notified only by the display unit 100 on the sub side. As a result, the notification that affects the privilege can be appropriately performed on the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the privilege, while the notification that does not affect the privilege can be displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side with a variety of navigation operations. ..

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
In addition, since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the winning combination "F_ sure chiririp" is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery (notification lottery) whether or not to notify is performed on the main side. It is managed by. That is, at the time of winning the winning combination “F_Sure Chiririp”, since the privilege to be given differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery, the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that influences the privilege and is strictly managed on the main side.

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, there may be a case where the notification as a presentation is made completely without any influence on the privilege to be given. In such a case, the notification lottery itself as to whether or not the notification should be made. On the sub side. For example, during the sign of CT, the privilege of CT has already been determined, and it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special symbol combination of "reach eye lip" (on the contrary, the privilege is not granted. If it is displayed, it makes the player dissatisfied, so it cannot be displayed).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the winning combination "F_reach eye lip AD" is won during the CT sign, the sub side performs the flag conversion lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the combination of the "reach eye lip" symbols is selected. Notify to display. As a result, in a situation where the award of CT sign has been decided to be granted, variations in the way the symbols are displayed are increased, so that improvement in game play can be expected. In addition, by performing the notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) in the period that does not affect the privilege at all, the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced, which is preferable.

(How to display game history)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful for the player is displayed on the first sub-display device 201. For example, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a top screen 211 showing a summary game history on the first sub-display device 201, a menu screen 212 that allows various operations on the pachi-slot machine 1, and game information screens 213, 214 showing a detailed game history. , 215 is displayed. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 registers a player who plays a game and provides a unique service to the player. For example, when the registration of the player is not accepted, although the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 showing the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the first sub display device 201, the registration of the player is accepted. In this case, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 showing the detailed game history are controlled so that they can be displayed on the first sub display device 201. Since it is possible to improve the convenience of the player by confirming a more detailed game history, the pachi-slot machine 1 can improve the convenience when the registration of the player is accepted.

Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that produces the effect, and the sub-control board 72 includes the first sub-display device 201 (and the sub-control substrate 72 via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown)). Since the second sub display device 202) is controlled and the display unit 100 is controlled via the accessory relay board (not shown), the first sub display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100. .. Specifically, the display of the first sub display device 201 can be switched even during a game (that is, an effect is being executed on the display unit 100). For the player, by switching the display of the first sub display device 201 during the game, it is possible to acquire various information without disturbing the effect being performed on the display unit 100, which is preferable.

In particular, like the display unit 100 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a planar image display is produced. When performing an effect using a video display with a sense of depth (stereoscopic effect) and an effect using a curved image display, the effect of the effect can be remarkably enhanced, but the effect such as a game history during the effect can be increased. Is not suitable for displaying irrelevant information. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since information unrelated to these effects is displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, without impairing the effect, In addition, various information such as the game history can be displayed appropriately.

By the way, generally, in a pachi-slot machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side when viewed from the player in the pedestal part, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side when viewed from the player, so when proceeding with a game In this case, the player operates the right side or the left side (side) of the pedestal.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface which stands upright from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub-display device 201 displays the first sub-display device 201 on the screen. A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 and the input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display thereof are provided at the place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is provided. Is improved. In particular, since the first sub-display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface of the pedestal portion 10 which stands upright from the horizontal plane, the player places the first hand on the pedestal portion 10 while holding his or her hand. It is possible to operate the device 201, which not only improves operability but also reduces fatigue associated with the operation, so that an improvement in operating rate can be expected.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 109. Detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted.

[Game Flow of Pachi-Slot Machine of Second Embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 98, a game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a game state transition flow regarding the presence or absence of notification of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the game state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 with the transition flow of the game state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, basically, the first embodiment and the second embodiment Games are played in the same flow, but during the ART game state, games are played in different flows. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment have greatly different control of CT during the ART gaming state.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal ART, and the gaming state is shifted to CT when the CT lottery is won. On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. Note that the MB (role “F_MB”) is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second-class special auditor, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 has the MB as an internal winning combination. Once determined, the corresponding symbol combination (combination “C_MB”) is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until it is displayed along the activated line.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, between the MB non-flags in the ART gaming state is a normal ART, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between MB flags when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during (H) normal ART. Between the MB flags in the ART gaming state, the game is played so that the symbol combination related to the MB is not displayed, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. Note that a method of playing a game so that a symbol combination corresponding to MB is not displayed between MB flags is already known, and, for example, a symbol whose symbol combination corresponding to MB is not displayed is aimed at. This can be realized by giving a notification or a notification of the pressing order in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is not displayed.

On the other hand, when CT ends, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) When the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. After that, when the end condition of the (J)MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag, and the normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed during MB flag>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, stop control different from that during the MB non-flag can be performed. For example, when the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, the internal winning combination is “MB+predetermined small because the MB is carried over during the MB flag. However, since the MB is not carried over during the non-MB flag, the internal winning combination is only the “predetermined small winning combination”. In the pachi-slot machine, the stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination, so even if the same predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between MB flags and MB non-flags, different stop control is performed. The stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small winning combination can be made different between MB flags and MB non-flags.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the stop control is made different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, so that it is difficult (or impossible) to display during normal ART (during MB non-flag). By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between MB flags), various game characteristics are realized. Hereinafter, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be specifically described while focusing on the difference from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of symbols displayed in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment have different types of winning combinations and types of symbol combinations, this point will be described first.

(Type of winning combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_chiririp”, “F_certain chililip”, “F_1 sure chililip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” were used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles “R_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” are used instead of these combinations.

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the winning combinations “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” are used in place of these winning combinations. In the following, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “push order bell”. In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment uses a winning combination (winning “F_MB”) related to an MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have. Note that other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

(Type of symbol combination used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd”, a combination of symbols of “bell”, “bell spilled eyes”, and “one sheet appearance” is used. Was used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6”, in addition to these symbol combinations, “MB "A combination of symbols of "cactus" is used. The combination of the symbols "MB" may be arbitrary. The combination of the symbols of “cactus” may be the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of the symbols of “bell” (9 Sheet).

<Correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol during MB non-flag>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a relationship between an internal winning combination during the MB non-flag and a combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag, the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” are different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order, and the pressing order is “. In the case of “press forward”, the symbol combination of “replay” is displayed along the activated line. On the other hand, when the pressing order is other than "Forward pressing", the combination of symbols of "Cililip" in the correct pressing order is displayed along the activated line, and the combination of symbols of "Replay" in the incorrect pressing order is Is displayed.

More specifically, in the case of the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, the combination of symbols of “single chililip” is displayed, and In the case of an incorrect answer pressing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the case of the combination “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, a combination of symbols of “two consecutive Chilelip” is displayed, and for each combination. In the case of an incorrect answer pushing order, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed. In addition, in the case of the combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each combination, the combination of symbols of the “3 consecutive combination Chilelip” is displayed, and for each combination. In the case of an incorrect answer pushing order, a combination of symbols of "replay" is displayed.

In addition, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” is different depending on the pressing order, and the correct answer is given for each combination. In the case of pressing order, the combination of symbols of "bell" is displayed, and in the case of the pressing order of incorrect answer for each role, the combination of symbols of "bell spilled" or "first page" is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol during the MB flag>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination in the MB flags and the combination of symbols displayed. As shown in FIG. 100, during the MB flags, the combination of symbols “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 continuous lip lip 4” is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combination “F_MB” and any one of the winning combinations “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, “Cililip” is inevitable. The combination of symbols is displayed along the activated line.

More specifically, in the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, the combination of symbols of “single chililip” is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order, and the combination “F_2 double chililip 1” is displayed. ~ In "F_2 series Chilelip 4", the combination of symbols of "2 series Chilelip" is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order, and in the part "F_3 series Chilelip 4" to "F_3 series Chilelip 4", it does not matter in the order of pressing. Instead, the combination of symbols of "three consecutive chili lip" is displayed along the activated line.

Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” are symbols that are displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag. While the combination is different, the pressing order is not affected during the MB flag for the combination of symbols displayed.

Further, in the MB flags, the combinations “F_pressing order bell 1” to “F_pressing order bell 6” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and are defined for each combination. A combination of symbols of "bell", "bell spilled or first sheet", "cactus", and "MB" is displayed according to the pressing order. Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the MB flag, more combinations of symbols are displayed than during the MB non-flag during the winning of the combination “push order bell”. be able to. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of symbols "bell" and "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” and the combinations “F_pushing order bell 1” to “F_pushing order bell 6” during the MB flag. , And the stop control for the winning combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” and the winning combinations “F_Pressing Order Bell 1” to “F_Pressing Order Bell 6”.

[Game flow during normal ART]
Next, the flow of the game during the normal ART of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip 4” displayed are different according to the pressing order. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the flag conversion lottery is performed. The notification for displaying the combination of symbols is given, and the number of ART games is added. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is given without adding the number of ART games.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the additional amount of the ART game when the flag conversion lottery is won based on the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the internal winning combination when the flag conversion lottery is won is the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, the smallest addition amount is determined, and the combination If it is "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4", the next smaller amount to be added is determined, and if the role "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4", the largest additional amount is determined. To do. As described above, when the winning of the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “Chililip” is performed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, the more Chile symbols are displayed, the more the amount of addition is. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
101 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, whether the main control board 71 converts the winning combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” into the winning combination “Chillilip” by using the ART flag conversion lottery table. Whether or not it is randomly determined (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, The sub-control board 72 notifies the incorrect pushing order for each winning combination through the display unit 100.

<Addition lottery table during normal ART>
Next, FIG. 102 is a normal ART mid-duration lottery table used for extra lottery to add the number of ART games performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The normal lottery table during the ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery by using the additional lottery table during the normal ART, and when the additional lottery is won, the main lottery board 71 responds. The number of games to be added is added (added to the ART number of finished games counter). Note that the lottery value information associated with the winning combination “single chili lip” in the figure is the “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_single chili lip 4” roles of the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery. The information of the lottery value which is referred to in this case and is associated with the winning combination “two consecutive chilirips” is the internal winning combination when the winning for the flag conversion lottery is “F_2 consecutive chililip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chililip 4”. The information of the lottery value which is referred to in a certain case and is associated with the winning combination “three consecutive Chilelips” is the internal winning combination when the flag conversion lottery is won, “F_three consecutive Chilelips 1” to “F_three consecutive Chilelips 4”. Is referred to.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a flow of the game during CT of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the method of managing the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by a set of eight games, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, The control board 71 determines the duration of CT based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called "difference number" obtained by subtracting "the number of medals used in the game" from "the number of medals paid out"). Manage.

Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, performs a notification for winning the MB at the time of winning the combination “push order bell”). ). Here, when the combination of symbols “Bell” and “Cactus” is displayed, nine medals are paid out. Therefore, when the combination of symbols “Bell” is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT If the flag conversion lottery is not won in the middle), the difference number (6 sheets) in which the duration of CT is increased is consumed. On the other hand, when a combination of symbols of "cactus" is displayed during CT (more specifically, when the flag conversion lottery is won during CT), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, Maintain CT duration.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the main control board 71 performs flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display the combination of symbols of “cactus” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and display unit 100. When notifying and not winning the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “bell” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order.

Then, the main control board 71 increases the difference number by 6 when the combination of symbols of “bell” or “cactus” is displayed, and consumes the duration of CT, but wins the flag conversion lottery. If so, the main control board 71 adds 6 not only to the difference number of sheets but also to the number of CT finished sheets. As a result, although the difference number in CT is increased by 6 in accordance with the display of the combination of the symbols of “Cactus”, the number of the end of CT is also increased by 6, so when the flag conversion lottery is won, the CT is changed. Will be maintained.

The flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with a plurality of stages of CT meters from "1" to "MAX", and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The probability is lowered, and the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the winning combination “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the main control board 71 has the lowest winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4” during the CT as the internal winning combination. There is a probability that the CT meter will be promoted, and during the CT, the roles “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4” will be selected as internal winning combinations, and the CT meter will be promoted with the next lowest probability, and during the CT. When "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

Further, the main control board 71 demotes the CT meter when the flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “push order bell” in the CT is won is not won. The main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability or may necessarily demote the CT meter when the flag conversion lottery is not won.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of ART games is added. The amount of addition of the number of ART games varies depending on the number of Chile symbols displayed, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the main control board 71 has a role of “F_Single Chile Lip 1 during CT”. ~ "F_ single Chilelip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the smallest additional amount is determined, and during CT, the roles "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chilelip 4" are determined as internal winning combinations. Then, the next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the winning combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 104 is an in-CT flag conversion lottery table used in the flag conversion lottery performed during the CT of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the winning combination “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” into “cactus” by using the ART flag conversion lottery table. Whether or not is randomly determined (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “cactus” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the press order is notified, and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 combine the symbols of “bell” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Informs the pressing order for displaying.

Here, referring to FIG. 104, it is understood that the flag conversion lottery during CT is easier to win as the value of the CT meter is higher, and when the CT meter is “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery is surely won. I understand. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the continuation period of CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is “MAX”, CT continues without being terminated. Since the profit given to the player will be excessive if the CT is not finished, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing when the CT meter becomes "MAX", and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets is also acceptable. May be provided, and both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets may be applied.

When demoting the CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the interest of the player will be lost. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter becomes "MAX". Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages of "1" to "MAX", for example, it is assumed that the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been played since the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery has been performed 8 times after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Further, the value of the CT meter after demoting is arbitrary, and for example, the CT meter may be demoted to "1" or the CT meter may be demoted to "7". The value of the demotion destination may be determined by lottery from "" to "7".

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 105 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current value of the CT meter and the internal winning combination.

Referring to FIG. 105, the probability of winning the lottery for the promotion of the CT meter is lowest in the part “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4”, and in the part “F_2 double chililip 1” to “F_2 double chililip 4”. It is understood that the second lowest, the combination “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is the highest. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time, but the invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<Addition lottery table during CT>
Next, FIG. 106 is a CT additional lottery table used for additional lottery to add the number of ART games performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The additional lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding additional number of additional games is added (ART end). Add to the game counter).

Referring to FIG. 106, as for the amount of addition of the ART game during CT, the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_single chililip 4” is the smallest, and the combination “F_2 consecutive chililip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chililip 4” is added. Next, it can be seen that the roles “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” are the largest. More specifically, in the roles “F_single Chilelip 1” to “F_single Chilelip 4” in which one Chile symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 or more games is added, and in which two Chile symbols are displayed. In "F_2 consecutive chililip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chililip 4", the number of ART games of 20 or more games is added and three Chile symbols are displayed. In "F_3 consecutive chililip 4", "F_3 consecutive chililip 4", More than 30 ART games will be added. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chile symbols displayed during CT.

[Game flow during CZ]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the flow of the game during CZ of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs, like the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of the CZ3 is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of the CZ1, 2 is the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. different.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the CZ1 and CZ2 are divided into the first half and the second half, and the ranks (modes and points) with different expectation of winning the ART lottery in the first half are promoted, In the latter half, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, the basic flow in such CZ1 and CZ2 is the same in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in the termination condition of the first half. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 are terminated based on the number of continuous games, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CZ1 is the first half of the game based on the number of continuous games. CZ2 ends the first half based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both the CZ1 and CZ2 perform lock lottery in the first half, and when the lock lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 and 2 is ended.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. This rank-up lottery is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. This lock lottery is a process of lottery as to whether or not to perform game lock based on an internal winning combination. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and locks the game (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 continues the first half of CZ1 until the first half of CZ1 has passed 15 games without ending the first half of CZ1.

Then, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ1 and shifts to the second half when the first half of CZ1 has passed 15 games or when the lottery is won. In the second half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. This ART lottery is also similar to that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55(A) and (C)), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Be sure to win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state if the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation in the case of winning the ART lottery. ..

On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the main control board 71 performs rank-up lottery for each game. This rank-up lottery is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 performs the end lottery in each game in the first half of CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 is ended and the latter half is moved to, while the end lottery is not selected. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

In the first half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs lock lottery for each game. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, it terminates the first half of the CZ2 and locks the game. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of CZ2 but continues the first half of CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

When the final lottery or the lock lottery is won, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ2 and shifts to the second half. In the latter half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. This ART lottery is also the same as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55(B) and (C) ), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Be sure to win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state if the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation in the case of winning the ART lottery. ..

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the lock lottery is performed every game in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of the CZ 2 is to win the end lottery instead of the number of continuous games.

[Data table in CZ]
Next, the data table used during CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Referring to FIG. 108, in the first half of the CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the end lottery is performed, and this end lottery can be won with a high probability. I understand. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 game state, the winning combination “replay” is one of winning combinations “F_maintenance rep A” to “F_RT4 rep_3rd”. In the pachi-slot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (about 1/7.3) or more. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 ends. It turns out that it occurs relatively often.

<Lock lottery table>
Next, FIG. 109 is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ1 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 109A is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 109(B) is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of the CZ2. The lock lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Comparing FIGS. 109(A) and (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 has a higher probability than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) have passed, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the final lottery is won. Further, the rank-up lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1, 2, and when the first half of the CZ1, 2 is finished, the ART lottery is performed based on the result of the rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is indefinite.

Also, the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination "Replay" is determined as an internal winning combination with a relatively high probability, so during CZ2, the rank-up lottery is performed compared to during CZ1. The chances of receiving it tend to decrease. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in the CZ2 than in the CZ1. As a result, even in the case of the CZ2 where the chances of receiving the rank-up lottery tend to decrease, it is possible to expect the transition to the ART.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above. Next, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT sign game and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the above-described second embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, if the transition between MB flags during normal ART is made, the next game immediately transitions to CT, but transitions between MB flags. It is also possible to sandwich a predetermined number of precursor games after playing.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from between MB non-flags to between MB flags. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), if the winning of the flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is won, the number of ART games is added (see FIG. 102). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between the MB flags affects the privilege given to the player, and therefore is performed on the main side (main control board 71).

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of symbols “Cililip” is always displayed regardless of the order of pressing when it is between the MB flags, so if the omen game is performed during the MB flags, From the stop control (combination of displayed symbols), the player may find that the aura game is in progress. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during the non-MB flag, the combination of the symbols "Chillip" is not displayed when the winning combination "F_single chillilip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chillilip 4" is won. , When the combination of symbols “Cililip” is displayed by pressing the button normally, the player will know that it is during the MB flag (predicament game).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the pushing order is intentionally notified. As described above, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the combination of symbols of “chirilip” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when informing the push order, the player recognizes that the combination of symbols “Cililip” is displayed according to the informed push order, and the player is in the middle of the MB flag. It can be difficult to grasp.

Since such notification of the pressing order does not affect the profit of the player at all, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the lottery (notification of whether or not to notify the pressing order during the MB flag). The lottery is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the information lottery during the MB flag may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery that does not affect the profit of the player at all on the sub side as in this modified example, the data capacity on the main side is increased. It is preferable because the processing load can be reduced.

FIG. 110(B) is a notification lottery table during the sign of CT used for notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge board 82. The notification lottery table in the sign of CT defines the information of the lottery value about the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table in the CT sign is won, the sub control board 72 notifies any pressing order other than the normal pressing through the display unit 100.

<Navigation order when pressing the bell between MB flags>
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the combination "push order bell" is won during the MB flag, more combinations of symbols are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols “bell” and “bell spilled or first sheet” is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, “combination” is displayed according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", and "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the pressing order necessary for displaying the combination of the symbols of "cactus" that can be displayed only during the MB flag is notified during the CT during the MB flag. ..

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, the content of the notification is changed according to the state until the MB starts.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART, the gaming state shifts between MB flags, and then CT is performed. In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches the predictive game a predetermined number of times after moving between the MB flags, the state during the MB flag is divided into the “predictive game” state, the “CT” state, and the “MB waiting” state. be able to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when the MB is won during the normal ART, the "predicament game" state during the MB flag is set, and after that, the predecessor game is performed a predetermined number of times and the CT starts, The state becomes the "CT" state during the MB flag, and then, when the CT ends, the state becomes the "MB waiting state" until the MB wins.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modified example, the content of notification at the time of winning the winning combination “push order bell” is changed according to the state during these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the “presage game” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of “bell” symbols via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. Notify the pressing order. Further, in the “CT” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of symbols “bell” or “cactus” is displayed via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. That is, in the “CT” state, the pressing order corresponding to either “bell” or “cactus” is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

In the “MB standby” state after CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 may notify any combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 may notify the pressing order in which the combination of symbols “Bell” is displayed, or the pressing order in which the combination of symbols “Cactus” is displayed. The notification may be made, or the pressing order in which the combination of symbols “MB” is displayed may be made.

On the other hand, during the normal ART, the combination of the symbols "cactus" cannot be displayed, so the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols "bell" is displayed.

[Effects of Pachi-Slot Machine of Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more combinations of symbols can be displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag during the winning of the combination “push order bell”. Specifically, during the MB non-flag, the combination of symbols "bell" and "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols such as "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled or first sheet" is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the MB flags. Specifically, it becomes possible to display a combination of symbols of "cactus" corresponding to a so-called rare combination between the MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare combination without changing the type of the winning combination and the winning probability. Can be increased. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the winning combination “push order bell” is changed, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of rare winning combinations with payout of medals.

In addition, when the combination of the symbols of “cactus” is continuously displayed during the MB flag, it is understood that the MB flag is in the middle. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of symbols of “cactus” is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the combination of symbols of “bell” is notified in the case of non-win. This is preferable because it makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state. Further, by controlling the content of the notification by the flag conversion lottery, it is possible to adjust the frequency of the symbol combination (rare part) of the "cactus" among the MB flags, and to diversify the game characteristics among the MB flags. You can

(Game during CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an additional chance zone in which the number of ART games is added, is performed during the MB flag. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continued during the MB flag until the difference number reaches the end number (50). During this CT, if the flag conversion lottery is not won at the time of winning the combination "push order bell", the difference number is increased and the duration of CT is exhausted, while if the flag conversion lottery is won, the difference number is increased and the number of finished sheets is increased. Is increased and the duration of CT is maintained. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, while the stop control is changed during the MB flag, the continuation of CT is performed according to the combination of symbols to be displayed (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery). Since it is possible to control the period, it is possible to diversify the playability among the MB flags.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT should be adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. You can Also, this CT meter is promoted when the winning combination “F_Single Chilelip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chilelip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, and is demoted if the winning between flags is not won during CT. The player has a strong interest in the result of the game during CT, and can diversify the playability between MB flags.

In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", you will have to win the flag conversion lottery for a predetermined period of time, so you can have expectations for the subsequent games, and the interest of the game will increase. Is improved.

(Combinations of symbols that can be displayed during MB flag and MB non-flag)
In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, not only the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination “push order bell” is different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag, but also the combination “F_single clip”. The combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning "1" to "F_3 consecutive chiririp" is also different. That is, during the MB non-flag, the combination of symbols "Replay" or "Chillip" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, the combination of symbols "Replay" is displayed. Only the combination of the symbols "Cililip" is displayed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag. The flag conversion lottery during the MB flag is to randomly draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the combination "push order bell" from among the combinations of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus", and between the MB non-flags. In the flag conversion lottery, the target to be notified at the time of winning the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 chililip” is drawn from a combination of symbols of “replay” or “chililip”. In this way, by performing the flag conversion lottery both during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag, it is possible to control the combination of symbols displayed in both the MB flag and the MB non-flag, It is possible to enhance the game play both between flags and between non-flags.

At this time, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery during the MB flag is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery during the MB non-flag is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. It As a result, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the playability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between during the MB flag and during the MB non-flag, it may be known from the combination of symbols displayed that the MB flag is in between. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, it is necessary to intentionally inform the push order during the MB flag, and it is difficult to grasp that the MB flag is in progress. Then, by controlling the notification of the pushing order on the sub side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and processing load on the main side.

[Modification]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bernavi between flags and Bellnavi between non-flags)
For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main side notifies by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor. The mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, so an example thereof is shown in FIG. 74 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 74, while "white 7 navi" and "blue 7 navi" are performed during the inter-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed. “Bernavi” or the like may be performed during the state.

In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74(A) and (B), when performing "Bell Navi" in the non-flag state, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value of "1" to "3" (push order combination second instruction information). ) Is displayed, as shown in FIG. 112, when performing “Bell Navi” in the inter-flag state, a numerical value of “12” to “14” (first push order combination instruction information) should be displayed on the instruction monitor. May be The navigation on the sub side via the display unit 100 may be common to both the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. The same applies to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the numerical value when performing "Bernavi" during MB non-flag and the numerical value when performing "Bernavi" during MB flag are different. May be

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, whether or not to grant the privilege is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, the combination of symbols displayed when the notification follow stop operation is performed. It will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give the privilege based on the combination of the symbols actually displayed.

In this case, the main control board 71 gives a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and based on the combination of the symbols displayed without following the notification. However, the privilege may not be granted. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols to be displayed is different according to the pressing order, when the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, There is a possibility that a special combination of symbols such as “three consecutive chirip” will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of the notification without giving the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profit (privilege))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification that affects profits is performed by performing notification random determination (flag conversion random determination) on the main side and controlling whether to perform the notification on the main side. For the notification that does not affect the profit, the sub-side performs the notification lottery and controls whether the sub-side performs the notification. Then, as an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the notification of the "reach eye lip" during the omen game is shown, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, This shows the notification of "Chillip" during the MB flag. In this respect, the notification that does not affect the profit is not limited to these.

In recent years, pachi-slot machines may make a transition to a state where it is easy (difficult) to perform game lock depending on the order of stop operations. For example, transition to a state where it is easy to lock the game when the pressing order is "left, middle, right", and transition to a state where it is difficult to lock the game when the pressing order is "right, middle, left". There is. In such a pachi-slot machine, by notifying the pressing order, it is possible to make a transition to a state where it is easy (difficult) to perform the game lock, but when whether or not to perform the game lock has an effect on profits, While the notification needs to be controlled on the main side, if the game lock is not effected on the profit, the notification may be controlled on the sub side.

It should be noted that the case where whether or not to perform the game lock affects the profit is, for example, when the game is locked as in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, and the ART lottery is won. Yes (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, the case in which whether or not to perform the game lock does not affect the profit is a case where the game lock is performed as an effect, for example, during a sign game in which it is decided to give a profit (privilege). By frequently performing the game lock, it is an effect to show that a profit will be given in the subsequent game.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 113(A), when the stop operation is performed in the pushing order of “left, middle, right” when the combination “F_maintenance rep A” is won, the lock state changes from “0” to “1”. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing ", left, right, middle", "middle, left, right", "middle, right, left", the current lock state is maintained, and "right, left, middle" "right" When the stop operation is performed in the pushing order of ", middle, left", the lock state changes from "1" to "0". Similarly, when the winning combination “F_maintenance rep B” is won, the lock state changes from “0” to “1” when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, and in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the lock state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the lock state transitions from “1” to “0”.

In the example shown in FIG. 113(A), in order to simplify the description, the lock state “0” is set to a state in which it is difficult to lock the game, and the lock state “1” is set to a state in which it is easy to lock the game. Of course, the lock state is not limited to two stages, and the number of stages may be three or more. Also, in the case of three or more stages, it is not necessary to transition one stage at a time, but multiple stages may be transited at once.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113(B), when the game lock affects the profit, the notification lottery as to whether or not to notify is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is displayed. Based on this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined pressing order. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, the sub lot (sub-control board 72) performs the notification lottery of whether or not to give the notice, and the sub-side has a predetermined push order based on the lottery result. To inform.

Depending on the pachi-slot machine, there are pachi-slot machines where the game lock affects the profit over the entire period of the game, and there are pachi-slot machines where the game lock does not affect the profit over the entire period of the game. There are pachi-slot machines in which the game lock does not affect the profit during the specific period of the game, while the game lock affects the profit during the predetermined period. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, during the period in which the game lock affects the profit, the notification lottery as to whether or not to notify is performed on the main side, and based on the result of the lottery, both the main side and the sub side push a predetermined push. While the order is informed, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, the sub-side performs the lottery for notifying whether or not to inform, and the sub-side notifies the predetermined pushing order based on the lottery result. May be

Since the game lock is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of shifting the lock state according to the pressing order shown in FIG. 113(A). That is, the main control board 71 randomly determines whether or not to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state setting unit that sets the lock state based on the detected stop operation sequence and the lock state set by the lock state setting unit. When the game lock determination means and the game lock determination means determined by means of performing the game lock, it functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72, the information lottery means for performing the information lottery whether or not to notify the push order in which the lock state setting means sets the lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult) , And a notification means for notifying a predetermined pushing order based on the lottery result of the notification lottery means.

(Normal ART and CT termination conditions)
The termination conditions for normal ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during the normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during the normal ART or CT, the number of times information is given that is advantageous to the player during the normal ART or CT, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games). ) As one set, an arbitrary end condition such as the number of sets and a continuation rate at the end of one set can be adopted.

Also, as the number of medals given during the normal ART or CT, for example, use the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game. May be In addition, the number of medals given during the normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and the notification is made regardless of whether or not the medals are actually increased. It may be calculated based on the number of medals to be increased in accordance with (according to the ideal value). Further, the number of awarded medals may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some of the winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as internal winning combinations, or for the winning combinations in which the combination of symbols is displayed/hidden depending on the timing of the stop operation, the winning combinations have been determined as internal winning combinations. However, the number of awarded medals may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (pushing order, timing))
In addition, the content of the notification that is usually performed during ART or CT is arbitrary, and the order of the stop operations (pushing order) in which a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified. It is also possible to notify the timing of the stop operation (a symbol to be aimed at) necessary for displaying.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the re-play is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game playability), and the player is informed of the advantageous stop operation mode. It is also possible to use a so-called "AT", and to activate a re-play high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of an internal winning combination relating to a re-play becomes high, and a stop operation advantageous for the player is performed. It is also possible to use a so-called “ART” that notifies the mode.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 described above, various display screens are displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10 (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub display device 202 provided on the right side (the medal slot 22 side) of the pedestal portion 10. Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub display device 202 may be switched based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor.

[Various functions of the main control board and the sub control board]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Next, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1. Therefore, the start operation detection means, the symbol variation means, the internal winning combination determination means, the stop operation detection means, the reel. It functions as a stop control means and a winning determination means.

Further, the main control board 71, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chile Lip” or “F_1 Sure Chile Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, performs the flag conversion lottery, and the result of this flag conversion lottery or other internal winnings. When the winning of the CT lottery based on the winning combination is won, the CT for extending the duration of the normal ART is started, and therefore, it functions as a conversion lottery means and an addition game starting means.

Further, the main control board 71 adds (extends) the number of ART games showing the duration period of the normal ART according to the internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, the number of normal ART ART games is increased by a predetermined amount depending on the role “cactus”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry”, and the number of normal ART ART games is determined by a specific amount according to the role “three consecutive chilirips”. Add on.
At this time, if the number of times the number of ART games based on the winning combination “three consecutive chillips” is added exceeds nine times, which is equivalent to one set of CTs, the main control board 71 makes nine times or more. Functions as an add-on control means to increase the add-on amount

Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in which the number of ART games is not added during CT by using the CT game number counter. When the CT game number counter counts 8, CT is ended. At this time, the main control board 71, when the winning combination "three consecutive chilirip" is won (that is, the flag conversion lottery is won), the game is set again eight times per set (the value of the CT game number counter is set to the initial value). Return), and functions as a counting means and an addition game ending means.

When the bonus winning combination (F_BB1, 2) is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the inter-flag state, and the bonus is activated in the inter-flag state (to the bonus. Until such a prize is won) To carry over the bonus-related part as an internal winning combination, it functions as a bonus carry-over means. Further, the main control board 71 functions as a bonus starting means for activating the bonus when the winning combination is won in the inter-flag state and shifting the gaming state to the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 determines a bonus winning combination and a predetermined winning combination (offset, F_special 1-3) as an internal winning combination. When a combination of symbols (C_BB1,2) corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, stop control is performed, and when a winning combination other than a predetermined winning combination and a predetermined winning combination are determined as an internal winning combination, depending on the winning combination. The stop control is performed so that the combination of the symbols that cannot be displayed cannot be displayed.
Then, the main control board 71 controls the instruction monitor of the information display 14 so as to win the winning combination when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed during the inter-flag state. The display of "10" and "11" (bonus instruction information) that uniquely shows the mode of the stop operation is notified, and "10" and "11" are displayed when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed. Since no notification is given, the instruction monitor of the main control board 71 and the information display 14 functions as an instruction information notifying unit.

At this time, the main control board 71 informs "10" and "11" via the instruction monitor only after the bonus notification. Specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over, the number of subsequent games is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined number. When the combination related to the bonus and the predetermined combination (off, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination after the winning, the main control board 71 informs "10" and "11" via the instruction monitor. , Which functions as counting means for counting the number of unit games after the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, the sub control board 72 manages the game history based on various command data received from the main control board 71, and when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the sub control board 72 accepts the registration of the player performing the game, so the history management It functions as a means and a registration receiving means.
Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, a plurality of display units 100 that perform an effect according to the progress of a game and a plurality of display units 100 that are provided separately and include a top screen 211 and game information screens 213, 214, 215 are provided. The sub-control board 72 includes the display unit 100 and the first sub-display device 201, which has a first sub-display device 201 that displays the display screen and a touch sensor 201a provided on the display unit of the first sub-display device 201. Control 201. Specifically, when the registration of the player is accepted, the sub control board 72 controls the first sub display device 201 so that the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be displayed, and the registration of the player is performed. If not accepted, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be displayed on the first sub-display device 201, so the sub-control board 72 functions as a control means.

Further, the main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means because it grants various benefits in accordance with the result of the game. Specifically, the main control board 71 gives a privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, and in the game in which the winning combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” is determined as the internal winning combination, When the combination of symbols "" is displayed, 9 medals are given, and when the combination of symbols "Bell's eyes" is displayed, 0 medals are given. Further, the main control board 71, when the combination of the symbols "3 consecutive chiririp" or "replay" is displayed in the game in which the winning combination "F_Sure Chiriripu" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is the same as the re-game operation. Grant the benefits of.
Further, the main control board 71 gives a privilege not based on the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line but also based on the result of the flag conversion lottery. For example, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_SureCililip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is won, a benefit such as winning in the CT lottery is given.

Further, since the sub control board 72 executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation via the display unit 100, the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect execution means.
Here, the main control board 71, when the privilege to be awarded is different depending on the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player via the instruction monitor. Is notified, and when the privilege given by the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is the same, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 executes an effect indicating the order of the stop operation regardless of whether the privilege given by the combination of the displayed symbols is the same or different.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs the CT lottery whether or not to start the CT, so that it functions as an advantageous state lottery means, and when the CT lottery is won, a predetermined number of predictive games are performed after the lottery is won. Since CT is started after being broken, it also functions as an advantageous state starting means.
Then, the sub-control board 72 performs flag conversion lottery on the sub side when the winning combination “F_probable chiririp” and “F_1 probable chiririp” is determined as an internal winning combination during this CT sign, and thus functions as a notification lottery means. To do.

Further, when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries the MB as the internal winning combination until it is determined that the MB has won, so that the main control board 71 functions as a predetermined winning combination carry-over means.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination among the MB flags for which MB is carried over as an internal winning combination. Also works.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when winning the flag conversion lottery, push order in which a combination of symbols of "cactus" is displayed for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the push order in which the combination of the symbols “Bell” is displayed for each winning combination is informed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Therefore, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as an informing unit.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the normal ART when the ART lottery is won, ends the normal ART when the duration of the normal ART ends, and when the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the CT is set. To start, it functions as first advantageous state control means and second control means. Since the duration of the normal ART is not consumed during CT, the main control board 71 interrupts the normal ART and starts CT when MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the normal ART. ..

Further, the main control board 71 counts the difference number during CT, and ends CT when the difference number reaches the end number. Here, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, and when the winning combination is won, the main control board 71 counts the difference number. Meanwhile, “6” is added and “6” is added to the number of finished sheets to maintain the CT continuation period. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, “6” is added to the difference number to be counted, and the duration of CT is consumed. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a counting unit, a second advantageous state ending unit, and a conversion lottery unit.

Further, the main control board 71, when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, the value of the CT meter that defines the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery. , While updating to a value easier to win the flag conversion lottery than the currently set CT meter value, if the flag conversion lottery is not won during CT, the flag conversion will be performed more than the currently set CT meter value. It functions as a lottery stage setting means (first lottery stage setting means) in order to update the value so that it is difficult to win the lottery.

Further, the main control board 71 performs the flag conversion lottery based on the value of the CT meter at the time of winning the combination “F_push order bell” during the MB flag (CT) in the ART gaming state, and the MB non-MB in the ART gaming state. Between the flags (normal ART), since the flag conversion lottery is performed based on the ART level and the lottery state when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is won, the first conversion lottery means and the second conversion lottery means. Function as.

Then, based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 gives a privilege, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pushing order through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means, and the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as an informing means.
Note that the main control board 71 gives a privilege of maintaining (that is, extending the duration of) the CT duration without being consumed when the flag conversion lottery during CT is won (“cactus”). When the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART is won (“Chirilip”), the privilege of adding the number of ART games is given.

In addition, the main control board 71, when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART during the non-MB flag, and then the predictive game is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the MB, the normal ART addition chance zone In order to start CT which is, it functions as an addition game state starting means.

In addition, the main control board 71 extends the duration of the normal ART and also plays a role during CT when the winning combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination. If the flag conversion lottery when the “push order bell” is won is won, it functions as a first addition control means and a second addition control means in order to extend the duration of CT.

Further, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, the main control board 71 performs the flag conversion lottery, and this flag Based on the result of the conversion lottery, it functions as a first notification lottery means for determining whether or not to notify for displaying the combination of symbols of "Chillip".
On the other hand, during the sign of CT, when the combination “F_single chililip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chililip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub control board 72 determines whether or not to notify the pushing order. The sub control board 72 functions as a second notification lottery means.

In addition, the main control board 71 starts CT when the predictive game is performed a predetermined number of times during the MB flag (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and when the hand “push order bell” is won over the period of this CT. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, it functions as a lottery state start means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display the combination of symbols of "bell" during winning the combination "push order bell" during the sign game between MB flags (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). The required push order is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, and during CT (lottery state) between the MB flags, “bell” or “bell” based on the result of the flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “push order bell” is won. The main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and display unit 100 informs the pressing order required to display the combination of the symbols of "cactus" via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. Functions as a means.

The display unit 100 includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light, a screen device C that displays an image according to the effect by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, and irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. The front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 that switch between the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 for the screen device that causes the image corresponding to the effect to appear by the irradiation of. Therefore, the irradiation light device B functions as an irradiation light device that irradiates the irradiation light, and the screen device C functions as a movable screen that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device. In addition, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 function as a drive device that drives the movable screen so that the position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted.

[Appendix 1]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and it is possible to play a game in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the game property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the rotation of the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the above-mentioned symbols, the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. Depending on the order of, a combination of a plurality of symbols including the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stop-displayed (for example, F_push-order bell 1- The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including 6), and the reels provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and stopping each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for causing the internal winning combination and the stop operation detecting means to determine the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the performed timing, Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is determined based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means When a predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. A predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, a main control board 71) that carries the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the winning is achieved, and the reel stop control means uses the predetermined winning combination carry-over means. When the push forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game that is not carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, between MB non-flags), it is possible to display the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. While stopping the fluctuation, stop the fluctuation of the symbol such that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and When a predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by a predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, between MB flags), the push order winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the symbols are determined according to the order of the stop operation. It is characterized in that the variation of symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the display means.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until the prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called inter-flag gaming state. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between non-flags (a game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination as a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, it is possible to win the rare combination by winning the push order during the flags. , It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of rare hands without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notifying means (for example, the information display device 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72) for notifying the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined role carry-over means are used to carry out the above. When a predetermined condition is fulfilled in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, a predetermined number of aura games are completed), a predetermined lottery is drawn for a predetermined period (for example, a cactus is displayed when F_push order bell is won). A lottery state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a lottery state (for example, CT) for performing a flag conversion lottery of whether or not to carry out, and the push forward combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the lottery state. Then, further comprising a conversion lottery means for performing the predetermined lottery, the notification means, the predetermined combination carry-over means until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination In (e.g., CT predictive game), when the push order combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the order of stop operations necessary to display the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified, In the lottery state, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified, while the conversion is performed. In the case where the predetermined lottery of the lottery means is non-winning, the order of the stop operation required to display the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is informed.

According to such a gaming machine, a lottery state for performing a predetermined lottery is provided between the flags, and the state before the lottery state between the flags is started and the lottery state between the flags is notified of the stop operation. Different content. Specifically, before the lottery state starts, the notification for always displaying the first symbol combination is performed, and during the lottery state, when the lottery is won, the second symbol that is not displayed between non-flags The notification for displaying the combination is performed. On the contrary, when the lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the first symbol combination is performed. When the second symbol combination (rare combination) is continuous, the player will know that it is between the flags, so even if it is between the flags, by intentionally informing the first symbol combination, the game is played. This is preferable because it makes it difficult for a person to understand the current state. In addition, by controlling the content of the notification by a predetermined lottery, the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) among the flags can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery, and therefore, during the flags. It is possible to provide a period having a predetermined playability, and it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, or when the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means based on the notification of the notification means, a privilege The present invention is further characterized by further including a privilege giving unit (for example, a main control board 71) for giving a privilege (for example, a privilege of maintaining the duration of CT).

When a lottery is won in a predetermined lottery, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination is performed. Therefore, according to such a gaming machine, the second symbol combination (rare part) is displayed, and the privilege is awarded. Will be done. Thereby, during the flag, not only the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery, but also the privilege to be given can be adjusted, so that the playability during the flag is increased. Can be diversified.

[Appendix 2]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and it is possible to play a game in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the game property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the rotation of the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the above-mentioned symbols, the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. Depending on the order of the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, cactus), a combination of a plurality of symbols can be stopped and displayed as a first winning combination (for example, F_pressing forward winning combination 1- The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including 6), and the reels provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and stopping each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for causing the internal winning combination and the stop operation detecting means to determine the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the performed timing, Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is determined based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means When a predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. A predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until the winning combination is determined, and the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination. A specific state starting unit (for example, the main control board 71) that starts a state (for example, CT) and numerical information (for example, the number of difference in CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state are counted. The counting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific state when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value. When a specific state ending means for ending the state (for example, the main control board 71) and the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific state, a predetermined lottery (for example, F_push order bell cactus at the time of winning). A conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing a flag conversion lottery) and a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means. Lottery step setting means (for example, a main control board 71) for setting the lottery step (for example, a CT meter), and notification means (for example, the information display device 14, the display unit 100, the main control board) for notifying information of the stop operation. 71, a sub-control board 72), and the reel stop control means, in the game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined winning combination carry-over means does not carry over the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, while the variation of the symbols is disabled so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, the order of the stop operation is stopped. When the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination according to the above, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and the counting means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In addition, a predetermined value is added to the predetermined numerical value and the predetermined value is added to the numerical information which is counted by itself, and in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, the counter is counted by itself. A predetermined value is added to the numerical information, and the lottery stage setting means causes the second winning combination (for example, F_single chililip 1 to F_3 consecutive chililip 4) to be an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state. Depending on the determination, the currently set lottery stage is updated to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage, and the notification means is the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In the case of winning, while notifying the order of the stop operation necessary to display the second symbol combination on the symbol display means, while the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is non-winning, the It is characterized by notifying the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until the prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called inter-flag gaming state. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, it becomes possible to win the rare combination by winning the first combination during the flags. , It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of rare hands without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period of time between flags, and a predetermined lottery is performed when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during this specific status. The content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of the lottery is changed. Specifically, when the lottery is won, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination that is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. On the contrary, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is displayed. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical value information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, but the threshold value is increased when the predetermined lottery result performed when the first winning combination is won is won, and the numerical value information is increased when it is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is related to the above notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is won), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (a predetermined lottery is not won), the duration of the specific state is consumed.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while changing the stop control during the flags, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of the symbols displayed (specifically, according to the predetermined lottery result). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game play between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination in the specific state (rare combination) The frequency of can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of a predetermined lottery (lottery stage). In addition, this lottery stage is updated (promoted) to a lottery stage in which it is easy to win a predetermined lottery when the second winning combination is won during the specific state. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination in the specific state (that is, a lot of the second winning combinations make it easier to win a predetermined lottery, and as a result, the specific state is It will continue for a long time), it is possible to diversify the game play between the flags.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and the specific state (for example, CT) as a state in which a game is to be played, by notifying information of a stop operation, the normal state is obtained. Compared with the advantageous state (for example, normal ART) advantageous for the player, and when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means in the specific state, the advantageous state is continued. It is characterized in that it further comprises additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the period.

According to such a gaming machine, the winning of the second role in the specific state leads not only to promotion of the lottery stage but also extension of the duration of the advantageous state. The player is more interested in the winning combination in the specific state, so that the game characteristics can be diversified between the flags.

Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second winning combination is the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display unit when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit. It includes a plurality of different second roles (for example, F_single chillips 1-4 and F_2 double chillips 1-4 and triple chillips 1-4), and the addition control means is configured to stop the fluctuation of the symbols. The second role having a larger number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means is characterized by extending the duration of the advantageous state longer.

According to such a gaming machine, since the additional amount of the duration of the advantageous state is different depending on the number of the specific symbols displayed when the second winning combination is won, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics among the flags. ..

[Appendix 3]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and it is possible to play a game in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the game property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the rotation of the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the above-mentioned symbols, the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. Depending on the order of the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, cactus), a combination of a plurality of symbols can be stopped and displayed as a first winning combination (for example, F_pressing forward winning combination 1- The internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations including 6), and the reels provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and stopping each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for causing the internal winning combination and the stop operation detecting means to determine the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. And reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the performed timing, Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is determined based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means When a predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. A predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until it is determined that a prize has been won, and the predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means. A specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the specific state, and a counting means (for example, a difference number in CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state (for example, the number of sheets) , The main control board 71) and when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value, the specific state is ended. When a specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) and the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific state, whether to display a cactus at a predetermined lottery (for example, F_push order bell winning) A conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the flag conversion lottery) and a lottery step from among a plurality of lottery steps that have different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means ( For example, a lottery stage setting means (for example, a main control board 71) for setting a CT meter and an informing means (for example, an information display 14, a display unit 100, a main control board 71, a sub-control) for notifying information of a stop operation. Board 72), and the reel stop control means, the first winning combination is an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined winning combination has not been carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carrying-out means. When it is determined as a role, while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and If the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, the above-mentioned operations are performed according to the order of stop operations. The variation of symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, and the counting means, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, While adding a predetermined value to the numerical information to be counted, a predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold value, in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, in the numerical information to be counted by itself A predetermined value is added to the notification means, and when the notification means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means. On the other hand, while notifying the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means while notifying, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is informed, and the conversion is performed. When the lottery step setting means sets a specific lottery step (for example, CT meter “MAX”), the lottery means always causes the predetermined lottery to be won during a unit game of a predetermined number of times, and the lottery step setting means Is set to a predetermined lottery stage, the predetermined lottery is won with a predetermined probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until the prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called inter-flag gaming state. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, it becomes possible to win the rare combination by winning the first combination during the flags. , It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of rare hands without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period of time between flags, and a predetermined lottery is performed when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during this specific status. The content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of the lottery is changed. Specifically, when the lottery is won, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination that is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. On the contrary, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is displayed. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical value information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, but the threshold value is increased when the predetermined lottery result performed when the first winning combination is won is won, and the numerical value information is increased when it is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is related to the above notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is won), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (a predetermined lottery is not won), the duration of the specific state is consumed.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while changing the stop control during the flags, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of the symbols displayed (specifically, according to the predetermined lottery result). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game play between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination (rare combination) among the flags The frequency of can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of a predetermined lottery (lottery stage). In particular, if a specific lottery stage is set as the lottery stage, it will be sure to win a predetermined lottery during a predetermined number of unit games, so you can have expectations for subsequent games, The interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the specific state, the lottery step setting means has a probability according to the currently set random drawing stage. It is characterized in that the stage is updated to a lottery stage in which it is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage.

According to such a gaming machine, promotion of the lottery stage based on the second role will be carried out with a probability according to the currently-selected lottery stage, so that there is a new game property for promotion of the lottery stage. The interest in the game is improved.

Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second winning combination is the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display unit when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit. It includes a plurality of different second roles (for example, F_ single chilly lip 1-4 and F_2 double chilly lip 1-4 and triple chilly lip 1-4), the lottery step setting means, when fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The second lot with a larger number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means has a higher probability of updating the lottery stage currently set to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage. Characterize.

According to such a gaming machine, since the probability of promoting the lottery stage varies depending on the number of the specific symbols displayed when the second winning combination is won, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics among the flags.

[Appendix 4]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided to the player so that the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. 2. Description of the Related Art There are known game machines that notify a player of advantageous information. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating) or the like, and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), which has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but since the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profit (so-called ball-out), in recent years The main (main control) side that manages the profit of the player is required to perform the navigation. Here, when performing navigation on the main side, the navigation has a strong implication of ensuring that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current gaming situation.

However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of navigation becomes monotonous, and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various types of navigation while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (eg, CT) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played, and a plurality of symbols are displayed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reels, and a main for controlling the progress of the game A control unit (for example, a main control board 71) and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls effects related to the game are provided, and the main control unit detects a start operation by the player. Based on the detection means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the symbol changing means (for example, a motor drive circuit) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel. 39, the main control board 71), and the first symbol combination (for example, replay) or the first symbol combination according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A combination of a plurality of symbols including the symbol combination of 2 (for example, reach eye lip) can be stopped and displayed (for example, F_reach eye lip A to D). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means (corresponding to the plurality of reels) for detecting a stopping operation for stopping each reel (for example, The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. By the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, a winning determination means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won, and the advantageous state. If the winning of the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) and the advantageous state lottery means that performs the first lottery (for example, the CT lottery) whether or not to start, the winning is performed. From the advantageous state start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the advantageous state after a unit game is played a predetermined number of times, If the winning combination is determined, a special lottery is given if the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the second lottery (for example, the flag conversion lottery) and the second lottery that the conversion lottery means performs. (Eg, a CT winning combination) and a privilege giving means (for example, a main control board 71) for giving a winning operation, and the reel stop control means performs a stop operation when the push order combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The variation of symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order, and the sub-control unit executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation. In the unit game of a predetermined number of times from winning the first lottery performed by the effect state lottery means to the effect state execution means (for example, the display unit 100 and the sub-control board 72), the push in the unit game And a notification lottery means (for example, a sub-control board 72) that performs a third lottery (for example, a navigation lottery during the CT sign) when the normal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, When the production execution means wins the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means of the main control section or the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub-control section, the second symbol is displayed on the symbol display means. It is characterized in that effects are executed according to the order of stop operations for displaying the symbol combination.

In such a gaming machine, when the second lottery performed on the main (main control unit) side is won, a special privilege is given and the second symbol is produced by the sub-(sub-control unit) side production execution means. Notification is given to display the combination. Since the second symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation according to this notification, from the player's point of view, the second symbol combination means a symbol combination (for example, reach) to which a special privilege is given. It will be. Therefore, even if the second symbol combination is displayed, if no privilege is given, the player feels a strong dissatisfaction and spoils the interest. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main side determines whether or not to grant the privilege, and the second symbol combination is notified in accordance with this determination. Therefore, a notification that affects the privilege (profit) is given. It can be properly managed on the main side.

By the way, in a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, not performing the advantageous control immediately, but performing the advantageous control after playing a predetermined number of games, for example, ART. If such a prize has been won, the player may actually start ART after playing the aura game several times. During such a sign game, it has already been decided to give a privilege (profit) to the player, so even if the second symbol combination is displayed and the privilege accompanying this display is not given. , The player will not be dissatisfied. That is, since the advantageous control is performed when the aura game is repeated several times, the player feels that the second symbol combination displayed during the aura game has provided a privilege, which is of interest. There is no loss. On the other hand, increasing the opportunity to display the second symbol combination (for example, reach eye) that is displayed when a special privilege is given increases the variation in the way the symbol combination is displayed and improves the game playability. To do.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification lottery means on the sub (sub-control unit) side is the first during the predictive game (a predetermined number of unit games from winning the first lottery to starting the advantageous state). 3 lottery is performed, and the effect execution means notifies the second symbol combination based on the lottery result. Although this notification is not related to the grant of the privilege as described above, by performing the stop operation in accordance with the notification, the second symbol combination displayed when the special privilege is granted can be displayed, and the game is played. The property is improved. As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the notification that influences the profit (privilege) is managed on the main side, while the notification that does not affect the profit has a variety of appearances on the sub side as a presentation presentation. A certain notification can be given.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means grants a privilege to win the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means when the second lottery is won.

Since the advantageous state starts when the first lottery is won, when such a gaming machine wins the second lottery (as a result, the second symbol combination is displayed), the advantageous state starts. Even in this case, the second symbol combination is notified along with the third lottery during the predictive game until the advantageous state starts. From the player's point of view, whether the display of the second symbol combination is displayed because the sign game is in progress (that is, is it displayed as a result of the third lottery), or the sign game is transferred in accordance with the display this time. Since it is not known whether it has been performed (that is, whether it is displayed as a result of the second lottery), the player has a strong interest in the flow of the game so far, and the interest is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means does not grant the special privilege when the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub-control part is won, and the main control part The special privilege is given when the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means is won.

According to such a gaming machine, of the second lottery and the third lottery that are conditions for informing the second symbol combination, a special privilege is given only when the second lottery performed on the main side is won, If the third lottery performed on the sub side is won, no special privilege is given. As a result, the main side manages notifications that affect profits (privileges), while the sub-sides can perform notifications with a variety of presentation effects on the sub side.

[Appendix 5]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and it is possible to play a game in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the game property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying the information of the normal state and the stop operation as a state in which the game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the A combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stopped and displayed as a first combination (for example, F_press order bells 1 to 6), and stop. A second winning combination (for example, F_single Chile 1 to 1) that can stop and display a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, Chilelip) according to the order of operations. 4, F_2 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4, F_3 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4), and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations. It is determined by stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and, when the variation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the internal winning A winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is won, and a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means. Once determined, the predetermined winning combination is regarded as an internal winning combination until the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. A predetermined role carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) to carry over, a notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72) for notifying the information of the stop operation; In the state, and when the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, if the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first lottery (for example, F_push order bell winning) The first conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs a flag conversion lottery for whether to display the cactus at a time, and the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination by the advantageous state and the predetermined combination carry-over means. If the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination when not carried over, a flag conversion of whether or not to display a second lottery (eg, F_single chililip, F_2 double chililip, F_3 chililip win) A second conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing lottery), and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carrying-out means (for example, , MB non-flag), when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol displaying means so as to stop the fluctuation of the symbols, while the second symbol is selected. The combination is made undisplayable, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-out means. Then, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined combination carry-over means allows the predetermined symbol to be displayed. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which a winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination, the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol is displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of the stop operation. While stopping the variation of the symbols so that the combination can be displayed, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, While stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed on the display means, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the third symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the notification means causes the first conversion lottery. When the first lottery of the means is won, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified. On the other hand, in the case of non-winning the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means, informing the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means, When the second lottery by the second conversion lottery means is won, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified, while the second conversion lottery is given. In a case where the second lottery of the means is non-winning, the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination on the symbol display means is informed.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until the prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called inter-flag gaming state. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the order of the stop operation between the non-flags, and between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination as a combination of symbols corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, a rare combination is won by a winning of the first combination during the flags. In addition to being able to do that, the rare part will always win in the second winning part, and the appearance frequency of the rare part can be increased without changing the type of the winning part and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag, the first lottery is performed, and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the non-flag. The second lottery is performed, and the content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of these lottery is changed. Specifically, when the first lottery is won, the notification for displaying the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. On the contrary, when the first lottery is not won, Notification for displaying the symbol combination 1 is performed. In addition, when the second lottery is won, the notification for displaying the fourth symbol combination is given. On the contrary, when the second lottery is not won, the third symbol combination is displayed. Make a notification.

Thus, between the flags, the combination of symbols to be notified based on the first lottery is determined, and between the non-flags, by determining the combination of symbols to be notified based on the second lottery, between the flags and between the non-flags. In both, it is possible to control the combination of symbols to be displayed, and it is possible to enhance the playability between both flags and between non-flags.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is won, or when the second lottery of the second conversion lottery is won, a privilege (for example, first lottery) A privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) that grants a privilege to maintain the difference in the end number of CTs in the case of winning a prize, and a privilege grant to increase the number of ART games in the case of winning a second lottery). It is characterized by further comprising.

When the first lottery is won, the second symbol combination is displayed by following the notification, and when the second lottery is won, the fourth symbol combination is displayed by following the notification. According to the gaming machine, the appearance frequency of the symbol combination (rare combination) to which the privilege is given can be controlled between the flags and between the non-flags, and the gaming property between both the flags and the non-flags is enhanced. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first conversion lottery means performs the first lottery so as to win the probability with a set first lottery stage (for example, a CT meter), When the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination, the currently set first lottery step is changed from the first lottery step. The first lottery step setting means (for example, the main control board 71) for updating the first lottery step having a high probability of winning the first lottery.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flags, the first lottery step is updated (promoted to the first lottery step with a higher probability of winning the first lottery). ) Will be done. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination between the flags, and the game characteristics can be diversified during the flags. In addition, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flags, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the third symbol combination is displayed. This is preferable because it is possible to know that the first lottery stage has been promoted.

[Appendix 6]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, a gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is also called an inter-flag RT, and it is possible to play a game in a state where the winning probability of the replay is high until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
By the way, some pachi-slot machines having RT between flags like Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but if the winning probability of replay is simply increased until a bonus is won, the game property is poor and further gaming is performed. There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which is rich in playability between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying the information of the normal state and the stop operation as a state in which the game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the A combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stopped and displayed as a first combination (for example, F_press order bells 1 to 6), and stop. A second winning combination (for example, F_single Chile 1 to 1) that can stop and display a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, Chilelip) according to the order of operations. 4, F_2 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4, F_3 consecutive Chilelips 1 to 4), and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of winning combinations. It is determined by stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and, when the variation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the internal winning A winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means is won, and a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means. Once determined, the predetermined winning combination is regarded as an internal winning combination until the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. The predetermined winning combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) to be carried over, and the internal winning combination determination in the state where the predetermined combination carrying-over means in the advantageous state has not carried over the predetermined combination (for example, between non-flags of normal ART). After the means determines the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination, and the predetermined number of unit games are played without winning the predetermined winning combination (for example, when the precursor is exhausted), the duration of the advantageous state is extended. The additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT), and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means during the additional game state. And, the first winning combination control means (for example, the main control board 71) that extends the duration of the advantageous state, and the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means during the additional playing state. Then, the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a flag conversion lottery for displaying or not displaying the cactus at the time of winning the F_push order bell), and the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means. When the lottery is won, the second addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) that extends the duration of the addition game state, and the notification means (for example, the information display 14 and the display unit) that notifies the stop operation information. 100, a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72), the reel stop control means, the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, between MB non-flag) ), when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol displaying means to stop the fluctuation of the symbols, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. Stop the fluctuation of the symbol, and when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined winning combination carry-over means, it is stopped. The variation of symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of operations, and the predetermined symbol carry-over means causes the predetermined symbol combination to be an internal winning combination. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game that has not been carried over, the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation. While stopping the fluctuation of the symbols, the second in the game in which the predetermined winning combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the variation of the symbol is stopped so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, while the variation of the symbol is disabled so that the third symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the second winning combination is stopped and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in a state where the predetermined winning combination carry-over means in the advantageous state is not carried over the predetermined winning combination, the symbol is given by the notifying means. A first notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the display means (for example, F_single chililip, F_2 twin chililip, F_3 chililip display chililip when winning) The first notification lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs a flag conversion lottery of whether or not to carry out, and the internal winning combination in a state where the predetermined combination carryover means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined combination. During the predetermined number of unit games (for example, during the CT precursor game) after the determination means determines the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination and before the additional game starting means starts the additional playing state. When the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the second notifying lottery means for performing the second notifying lottery for determining whether or not to notify the order of the stop operation by the notifying means ( For example, the sub-control board 72), further, the notification means, based on the lottery result of the first notification lottery of the first notification lottery means, and the second notification lottery of the second notification lottery means, It is characterized by notifying the information of the stop operation.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until the prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so that it has a so-called inter-flag gaming state. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs reel stop control according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, other winning combinations overlap with the predetermined winning combination. Therefore, even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). The stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the order of the stop operation between the non-flags, and between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between flags and non-flags, that is, different symbol combinations between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed during the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give variety to the game during the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination as a combination of symbols corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, a rare combination is won by a winning of the first combination during the flags. In addition to being able to do that, the rare part will always win in the second winning part, and the appearance frequency of the rare part can be increased without changing the type of the winning part and the winning probability.

By the way, in a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, not performing the advantageous control immediately, but performing the advantageous control after performing a predetermined number of games (precursor game). There is. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is in the advantageous state and the predetermined winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination, that is, when the flag is reached during the advantageous state, the additional playing state is started, and this additional playing state Before the start of, the predictive game is performed a predetermined number of times.

Since the stop control is different between the non-flags between the flags as described above, when the sign game is performed during the flags like the gaming machine of the present invention, the stop control (combination of the symbols displayed) Therefore, the player may know that the omen game is in progress. For example, during the flag, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed in the winning of the second combination, and the third symbol combination is not displayed. On the other hand, during the non-flag, depending on the pushing order of the second winning combination. Since the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed, if the fourth symbol combination is frequently displayed regardless of the pressing order, the player is in the middle of the flag (during the omen game). Will be understood.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag (during a sign game), the pushing order (stop operation order) is intentionally notified. At the time of winning the second combination during the flags, since the fourth symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing order, it is not necessary to notify the pressing order as it is, but when the pressing order is notified, The player recognizes that the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the informed push order (note that, between the non-flags, the fourth symbol combination is displayed depending on the push order, so the fourth in the informed game) When the symbol combination is displayed, the player can easily recognize that it is between non-flags), and it is difficult for the player to grasp that it is during flags (predicament game). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game in the middle of the flag (during a sign game) from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the playability in the middle of the flag.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the effects regarding the game are provided, The second notification lottery means is included in the sub control unit.

In recent years, it has been required that the main profit (main control unit) be properly managed by the player, and since the notification of the stop operation affects the profit, the notification of the stop operation that affects the profit is performed by the main. Must be controlled by the side. In this regard, the notification of the pushing order when the second winning combination is won during the flags does not affect the profit (that is, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed during the flags). In this gaming machine, the notification is controlled by the sub (sub control unit) side. Since the main controller has a larger capacity limit than the sub controller, the capacity and processing load of the main controller can be reduced by controlling notification on the sub side when it does not affect profits. It is suitable.

[Appendix 7]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the AT game number is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the AT game number has been demanded.

The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing without getting bored.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main switch) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol display is achieved by stopping the rotation of the reel. The reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, a winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won, and a predetermined condition. When the above is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state Depending on the internal winning combination determined by the means, the addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state (for example, adding the number of ART games), and the addition game state, Counting means (eg, CT game number counter, main control board 71) that counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended by the addition control means, and the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number (eg, 8 times). When the game is reached, the game is finished and the game is finished. (For example, a main control board 71).

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the additional game state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended (addition is not performed) during the addition game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the addition game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state continues for a longer time as the additional game is performed. For the player, it does not know how long the add-on game state will continue, and as long as the add-on is in the add-on game state, the add-on game state does not end, so for the game in the add-on game state It is possible to continue to play the game without getting bored because of a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while the player is in the additional playing state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination (for example, F_probable chililip, F_1 probable chililip) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means, a conversion lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery. (For example, a main control board 71) further, the addition control means, if the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, if the predetermined lottery is won, the continuation period is set. When the second winning combination (for example, cactus, weak cherry, strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the continuation period is extended by the second additional charging amount. The counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the continuation period is extended in response to the first winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination.

In such a gaming machine, when the first winning combination or the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the additional playing state, the additional winning is performed, and the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the addition is performed in accordance with, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. As a result, for example, even if the additional game state is about to end (the count result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game is performed according to the first role, and the additional game state is restarted from the beginning. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

Further, the addition based on the first winning combination (returning the counting result to the initial value) is performed only when the first winning combination is won in a predetermined lottery when the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given, and it is possible to balance the profits of the player and the game shop.

[Appendix 8]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a gaming machine is known that informs a player of advantageous information such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to drop a winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. There is. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is called AT (assist time). In addition, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (replay) is decided as an internal winning combination is high is also called an ART machine or the like.

According to the gaming machine equipped with such AT function and ART function, the number of gaming media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation, so that the player can perform AT or ART. You will want to have a long period of time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity for increasing the period of AT or ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document (JP 2010-057732A), it is specified that watermelon, cherry, etc. are specified as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when the winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination to play the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the AT game number is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the AT game number has been demanded.

The present invention has been made in view of such demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing without getting bored.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. Then, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And, based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, by rotating the reel, the symbol Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means for changing the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main switch) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol display is achieved by stopping the rotation of the reel. The reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means, and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the symbol Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, a winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means has won, and a predetermined condition. When the above is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state When a predetermined winning combination (for example, triple chili lip) is determined as an internal winning combination by the means, an addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) that extends the duration of the advantageous state, and the addition gaming state. In the above, the counting means (for example, the CT game number counter, the main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games in which the continuation period is not extended by the addition control means, and the counting means for a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times). When the unit game is counted, the additional game state ends. And the additional game ending means (for example, the main control board 71), the additional control means, when the number of times of extension of the continuation period during the additional game state is a specific number of times or less, the predetermined role Is determined as an internal winning combination, the continuation period is extended by a first additional amount (for example, 10 games), and when the extension number exceeds the specific number of times, the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In response to the execution, the continuation period is extended by a second additional amount (for example, 20 games) larger than the first additional amount.

In such a gaming machine, when shifting to the additional game state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended (addition is not performed) during the addition game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the addition game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state continues for a longer time as the additional game is performed. For the player, it does not know how long the add-on game state will continue, and as long as the add-on is in the add-on game state, the add-on game state does not end, so for the game in the add-on game state It is possible to continue to play the game without getting bored because of a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game while the player is in the additional playing state.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the number of additional times triggered by a predetermined winning combination (the number of times of extension of the continuation period) exceeds a specific number of times, the amount to be added per time is changed from the first additional amount. Increase to the second additional amount. As described above, the addition means that the counting means does not count, and the addition game state continues, so from the player's point of view, the addition amount increases once as the addition game state continues. You can have an expectation about, and you can increase the interest of the game during the additional playing state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the continuation period is extended in response to the predetermined winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination. And

According to such a gaming machine, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value when the addition is carried out triggered by the predetermined winning combination. As a result, for example, even if the additional game state is about to end (the count result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game is started with the predetermined combination as a trigger, and the additional game state is restarted from the beginning. Therefore, it is possible to have an expectation that the additional amount per time will increase. Here, in order not to resume the addition game state, in order to have the game property of increasing the addition amount per time, the winning probability of the predetermined combination must be a certain probability or more, and the game balance is lost. Although there is a possibility that it will be lost, even if the winning probability of a predetermined combination is suppressed by restarting the addition game state, it is possible to give the game property of increasing the addition amount per time, and the game balance While trying, it is possible to give a high playability.

[Appendix 9]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided to the player so that the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. 2. Description of the Related Art There are known game machines that notify a player of advantageous information. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating) or the like, and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), which has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but since the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profit (so-called ball-out), in recent years The main (main control) side that manages the profit of the player is required to perform the navigation. An example of such a navigation is a navigation for winning the bonus combination when the bonus combination is won.

By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub side as in the past, navi has a meaning as a production, and in order to realize various game play, a navigation like a production suggesting a game situation is provided. Since it is possible, for example, even at the timing when the bonus combination cannot be won, it is possible to perform the navigation to aim the bonus symbol. On the other hand, when navigating on the main side that manages profits, there is a strong implication of ensuring that profits are strictly managed, and it is required that the current gaming situation be strictly represented. However, for example, it is not possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus role at the timing when the bonus role cannot be won.

Here, in a pachi-slot machine, when a bonus combination and another combination are won in a redundant manner, the bonus combination may be preferentially drawn in over the bonus combination, so the bonus combination is won. This does not necessarily mean that the bonus role will be won, but it is required to perform navigation at an appropriate timing.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to perform a navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. And a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , A main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the effect on the game, the main control unit is a player Based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) that detects the start operation by the start operation and the start operation detecting means detects the start operation, the symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel. An internal winning combination determination that determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability based on the variation means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Means (for example, main control board 71) and stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. And, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel. A combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the variation of the symbols being displayed and the reel stop control means. Based on the above, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means determines whether or not the internal winning combination is won (for example, the main control board 71), and the internal winning combination determining means determines the internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the bonus carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries the bonus combination as an internal winning combination until the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means, and the winning determination means. When it is determined that the bonus combination has been won, the bonus start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the bonus state, and the instruction information notifying means for notifying the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation. (For example, the information display 14 and the main control board 71) In the game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the information notifying means determines that the first combination (for example, F_special combinations 1 to 3) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. While the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, the second combination (for example, F_maintenance rep A) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. In this case, the reel stop control means does not notify the bonus instruction information, and when the bonus combination and the first combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the reel combination control unit selects the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination. While stopping the fluctuation of the symbols so that they can be displayed on the symbol display means, when the bonus combination and the second combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination according to the bonus combination is the symbol display means. It is characterized by stopping the fluctuation of the design so that it cannot be displayed.

In such a gaming machine, the instruction information informing means included in the main control portion informs the bonus instruction information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, and therefore, under the control of the main side. It is possible to perform navigation to win a bonus role. Here, the bonus instruction information is notified when the first winning combination that can display the symbol combination according to the bonus winning combination on the symbol display means is winning together with the bonus winning combination, and the symbol combination indicating the winning combination is displayed. When the second winning combination that cannot be displayed on the means is won together with the bonus winning combination, no notification is given. Therefore, according to the navigation by the main control unit of the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control unit is provided after the internal winning combination determination means determines the bonus combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carryover means does not carry over the bonus combination. When a counting means for counting the number of unit games (for example, the main control board 71) and the bonus carryover means do not carry over the bonus combination, the internal winning combination determining means determines the bonus combination as an internal winning combination. In addition, a predictive game number determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a predictive game number indicating the number of unit games until the bonus notification for notifying that the bonus combination is carried over is further provided. The instruction information notifying unit does not notify the bonus instruction information until the counting unit counts the unit games for the number of precursor games, and the counting unit for the unit games for the number of precursor games. When the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in addition to the bonus winning combination after counting, the bonus instruction information is notified.

When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination may be notified after the player has played a predetermined number of times after the bonus combination is won. For example, it is generally performed to enhance the effect by performing an effect that is performed over a plurality of games (so-called continuous effect) and notifying whether or not a bonus combination is won according to the result of the continuous effect. There is. In this case, if the main side notifies the bonus instruction information during the continuous production, the meaning of the continuous production may be diminished and the interest may be spoiled. Here, since the main control unit has a limited capacity, it is preferable to control the production on the sub (sub-control unit) side in order to perform various productions with high production effects, while managing profits. The main control unit that does not accept signals from the outside is required to be devised so as to be able to appropriately grasp the timing when the continuous production controlled by the sub side ends.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main side determines the number of predictive games until the bonus notification, and the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Count the number of times. Then, when the counting result reaches the number of precursor games, the bonus instruction information is notified. Since a signal can be notified from the main side to the sub side, by controlling the effect according to the number of games to be notified of the bonus instruction information on the sub side, for example, the bonus on the main side during continuous effect. The instruction information will not be reported. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side while ensuring the variety of effects.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming state in which a gaming state has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. And, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, the display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), a main control unit (e.g., main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (e.g., sub-control board 72) that controls the effects related to the game. Based on the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the reel is rotated to change the symbol. Based on the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) to be caused and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the first operation is performed according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined. Of a plurality of combinations including a push order combination (for example, F_3 selection bell_1st) in which a combination of a plurality of patterns including a symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second pattern combination (for example, a bell-shaped eye) can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from the inside, and a stop operation that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and that stops each reel is detected. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means, The reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. At the time of winning, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won (for example, the main control board 71), and the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the bonus winning combination is carried over as the internal winning combination until the winning determining means determines that the bonus winning combination has won. With the carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the winning determination means, When it is determined that a prize has been won, a bonus starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the bonus state and an instruction information notifying means (for example, information display) for notifying instruction information uniquely indicating a mode of the stop operation. In the game in which the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying unit has a predetermined combination (for example, F_special combination). 1 to 3) is determined as an internal winning combination, while the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, the push order combination is added in addition to the bonus combination. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, the push order combination first instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means without notifying the bonus instruction information. In the game in which the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, the stop for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means when the pushing forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination The second push-combination instruction information different from the first push-combination combination first instruction information indicating the mode of operation is notified, and the reel stop control means determines that the bonus combination and the predetermined combination are internal winning combinations. If the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the symbol display means to stop the fluctuation of the symbols, while the bonus combination and the pushing forward combination are determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized in that the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the symbol display means cannot display the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination.

According to such a gaming machine, when the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notified by the instruction information notifying means is such that the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination along with the pushing winning combination. Is the push order combination first instruction information, while it is the push order combination second instruction information when the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination together with the push order combination. Since both of the push order combination first instruction information and the push order combination second instruction information show the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the instruction information notification It is possible to grasp whether or not the bonus winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the pushing normal winning combination, from the type of the notification of the pushing normal combination by the means.

[Appendix 10]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, as shown in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075305), a gaming machine that cooperates with a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by the player is also known. In such a gaming machine, by registering a player in cooperation with a mobile phone or the like, it is possible to manage a player's unique game history and the like, and to provide individual services that have not existed before. ..

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
However, it cannot be said that the player registration type conventional gaming machine is necessarily convenient for the player, and a device for further increasing the convenience for the player has been demanded.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to improve convenience in a player registration type gaming machine.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that progresses a game by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows in accordance with the result of the internal lottery, and an irradiation light device that irradiates irradiation light (for example, irradiation An optical device B), a movable screen (for example, a screen device C) that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device, and the position at which the movable screen is arranged is adjustable. A drive device that drives the movable screen (eg, front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2), history management means (eg, sub-control board 72) that manages the game history indicating the result of the game, and the history management. A top screen (for example, a top screen 211) that displays a summary game history that is a part of the game history managed by the means, and a detailed game including the summary game history of the game history managed by the history management means. A display device (for example, a first sub display device 201) separate from the movable screen, which displays a plurality of display screens including a game information screen (for example, game information screens 213, 214, 215) for displaying history. An input receiving unit (for example, a touch sensor 201a) that receives input information for controlling the display of the display device, and a control unit that controls the display device based on the input information received by the input receiving unit ( For example, the sub-control board 72) and a registration receiving unit (for example, the sub-control board 72) that receives the registration of the player who plays the game are provided, and the control unit does not receive the registration by the registration receiving unit. In this case, it is impossible to display the game information screen based on the input information, and when the registration receiving means accepts the registration, the display device is capable of displaying the game information screen based on the input information. It is characterized by switching the display of.

According to such a gaming machine, if the registration of the player is not accepted, the game information screen displaying the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the display device, but if the registration of the player is accepted, The game information screen can be displayed on the display device. Since it is possible to improve the convenience of the player by confirming a more detailed game history, the gaming machine according to the present invention can improve the convenience in the player registration type gaming machine.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display device for displaying the game information screen or the like is provided separately from the movable screen for displaying the video according to the effect. For example, a game machine that displays a game information screen on a movable screen is also conceivable, but with such a game machine, it is difficult to display the game history during the production, and in the conventional game machine, Only when not playing a game, various display screens could be displayed on the movable screen. However, the player may want to confirm information other than the performance during the game, and the conventional game machine that can display the display screen only when the game is not performed is inconvenient. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the display device is provided separately from the movable screen, various display screens can be displayed even while performing the effect on the movable screen, and convenience is improved. To do.

Further, like the gaming machine according to the present invention, when an image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the movable screen in which the position where it is arranged is operated, various information other than the effect cannot be correctly displayed while the movable screen is operating. There is a risk. In this respect, by displaying various display screens on a display device provided separately from the movable screen, the movable screen is activated, and various information other than the effects is displayed even when the effect with high effect is being executed. It can be displayed appropriately and convenience is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the input receiving means is a touch sensor provided on a display unit of the display device.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can make an input through the touch sensor, so that the display of the display device can be controlled by an intuitive operation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a pedestal portion (for example, the pedestal portion 10) having a substantially horizontal plane, and an insertion opening provided on a side of the substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion for inserting a game medium for playing a game. (For example, a medal slot 22 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10) and a bet button (for example, a MAX bet button 11 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10) are further provided, and the display device is provided from the pedestal portion. It is characterized in that it is provided in the vicinity of the insertion port and/or the bet button on a surface that stands substantially vertically.

Generally, in a gaming machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side of the pedestal when viewed from the player, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side of the player. The player operates the right or left side of the pedestal. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display device is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface that stands substantially vertically from the pedestal portion, and the display of the display device is controlled based on the touch input detected by the touch sensor. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display device and the input device (touch sensor) for controlling the display are provided in the place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is improved. .. In particular, since the display device with the touch sensor is provided on the surface standing from the pedestal portion (horizontal surface), the player can operate the display device while placing his or her hand on the pedestal portion. As a result, not only the operability is improved, but also the fatigue associated with the operation can be reduced, so that an improvement in the operating rate can be expected.

[Appendix 11]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of multiple reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the multiple reels stops, and the combination of symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given according to the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, information for establishing an internal winning combination is provided to the player so that the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination is not lost in recent years. 2. Description of the Related Art There are known game machines that notify a player of advantageous information. It should be noted that such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating) or the like, and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), which has an AT function. Gaming machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but since the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profit (so-called ball-out), in recent years The main (main control) side that manages the profit of the player is required to perform the navigation. Here, when performing navigation on the main side, the navigation has a strong implication of ensuring that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current gaming situation.

However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of navigation becomes monotonous, and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various types of navigation while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and a symbol display means for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, , A display window 4), a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the effects related to the game. The control unit rotates the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the above-mentioned symbols and the start operation detecting means, the order of the stop operation is determined when the internal winning combination is determined. Accordingly, the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, Bell-eye drop) can be stopped and displayed as the first combination (for example, F_3 selection bell 1st), and the internal winning combination has been determined. At this time, depending on the order of the stop operation, a third symbol combination (for example, three consecutive Chilelips) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, Replay) includes a second winning combination (for example, F_certain Chilelip) that can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determination means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided to correspond to the plurality of reels and for stopping each reel. Stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting an operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. Based on the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and a privilege depending on the result of the game. Grant (for example, a privilege of paying out medals or shifting the RT gaming state according to the combination of displayed symbols, and granting rights to CZ, ART, CT according to lottery based on an internal winning combination) Privilege giving means (for example, the main control board 71) and instruction information notifying means (for example, the information display 14 and the main control board 71) for giving the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation. And the sub-control unit executes the effect according to the mode of the stop operation (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72). ), the privilege granting means, when the first symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the second symbol combination is Different from the case of being displayed, the case where the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the fourth combination. When the symbol combination is displayed, the same privilege is given, and when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying means causes the symbol displaying means to display the first winning combination. While notifying instruction information that unequivocally indicates the order of the stop operation for displaying, the effect execution means is an effect indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying means does not notify the instruction information, and the effect executing means causes the symbol displaying means to display the third symbol combination. Alternatively, it is characterized in that an effect indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination is executed.

In such a gaming machine, the navigation that affects profit (privilege) is managed on the main (main control unit) side, while the navigation that does not affect profit is managed on the sub (sub control unit) side. Specifically, the first winning combination that gives different benefits when the displayed symbol combinations are different (that is, the first winning combination is displayed when the first symbol combination is displayed and when the second symbol combination is displayed). The navigation is performed differently) and the navigation is performed by both the instruction information notification means controlled by the main side and the effect execution means controlled by the sub side, and even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different, the same benefit is given. The navigation of the second combination to be given (that is, the second combination is given the same privilege when the third symbol combination is displayed and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed) is on the main side. No instruction information notifying means, but only the sub-direction effect executing means. Here, the navigation controlled by the sub side has a meaning as an effect, and it is possible to navigate in a variety of ways, and various game characteristics can be realized. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the navigation that influences the profit should be appropriately performed on the main side that manages the profit, while the navigation that does not affect the profit should be performed on the sub side with various navigation. You can

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the fourth symbol combination is all on a predetermined line formed by connecting unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel in the symbol display means. It is a combination of symbols in which a specific symbol is displayed in the unit symbol display area, and the privilege granting means grants a privilege with a predetermined probability when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the effect executing means. Indicates the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display unit when the privilege granting unit grants the privilege in the game in which the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. While performing the effect, when the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege in the game in which the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the effect is not executed.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and it is decided that a privilege is to be awarded, a navigation for making a fourth symbol combination in which specific symbols are aligned on the line ( On the other hand, even if the second winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, the navigation is not performed if it is decided not to grant the privilege. Here, since whether or not to give a privilege is decided before the symbol combination is displayed, the profit obtained by the player does not change depending on the symbol combination displayed. By controlling such navigation on the sub side, for example, an effect such as “aim for a specific symbol” can be executed according to the type of privilege to be given, and the variety of games can be secured. As a result, while the navigation that influences the profit is properly performed on the main side that manages the profit, the navigation that does not affect the profit can be performed on the sub side with various kinds of navigation.

1... Pachi-slot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R... Stop button, 71... Main control board, 72... Sub control board, 100... Dot display device

Claims (2)

A gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played,
With multiple reels with multiple symbols displayed,
A symbol display means for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reel,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player,
On the basis of the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel,
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, an internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability,
Stop operation detecting means which is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped so that it is displayed on the symbol display means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol,
Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been won based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Winning determination means for determining
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an additional game start means for starting an additional game state for extending the duration of the advantageous state,
In the plus gaming state, plus subject combination by the internal winning combination determination means when it is determined as the internal winning combination, to extend the duration of the beneficial state, role other than the plus target combination is determined as the internal winning combination Then, addition control means that does not extend the duration of the advantageous state ,
Counting means for counting the number of unit games in which the continuation period is not extended by the addition control means in the addition game state,
Add-on game ending means for ending the add-on game state when the count result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times,
Equipped with
The addition target combination includes a predetermined combination,
The plus control means, the number of unit game that extending the duration during said plus gaming state, when the number of times more than a specific number of times, the continuation in response to the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination When the number of unit games in which the period is extended by the first additional amount and the continuation period is extended during the additional game state exceeds the specific number of times, the predetermined winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination. Extending the duration by a second additional amount that is greater than the first additional amount,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played,
With multiple reels with multiple symbols displayed,
A symbol display means for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reel,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player,
On the basis of the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, a symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel,
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, an internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability,
Stop operation detecting means which is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel,
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped so that it is displayed on the symbol display means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol,
Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been won based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Winning determination means for determining
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an additional game start means for starting an additional game state for extending the duration of the advantageous state,
When the internal winning combination determining means determines the internal winning combination as an internal winning combination in the additional playing state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended, and a combination other than the additional target winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Then, addition control means that does not extend the duration of the advantageous state,
Counting means for counting the number of unit games in which the continuation period is not extended by the addition control means in the addition game state,
Add-on game ending means for ending the add-on game state when the count result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times,
Equipped with
The addition target combination includes a predetermined combination,
The addition control means determines the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination when the number of unit games in which the continuation period is extended during the additional playing state is less than a specific number of times greater than the predetermined number of times. In response to this, the duration is extended by a first additional amount, and when the number of unit games in which the duration is extended during the additional gaming state exceeds the specific number of times, the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In response to the determination, the continuation period is extended by the second additional amount that is larger than the first additional amount,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images